JVC KV MRD900 User Manual

9-INCH WIDESCREEN MONITOR  
WITH DVD PLAYER  
KV-MRD900  
MONITOR DE PANTALLA ANCHA DE 9 PULGADAS  
CON REPRODUCTOR DVD  
KV-MRD900  
MONITEUR COULEUR A ECRAN LARGE DE 9 POUCES  
AVEC LECTEUR DE DVD  
KV-MRD900  
• This system cannot receive television broadcasts. Use the separately sold TV tuner unit KV-C1000 for  
optional television broadcast reception.  
• Este sistema no puede recibir emisiones de televisión. Utilice la unidad de sintonizador de TV móvil  
KV-C1000 vendido por separado para una recepción opcional de emisiones de televisión.  
• Ce système ne peut pas recevoir les émissions de télévision. Utilisez le module de tuner de télévision  
mobile KV-C1000 vendu séparément afin de pouvoir recevoir les émissions de télévision.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, référez-vous au manuel séparé.  
For customer Use:  
Enter below the Model  
No. and Serial No. which  
are located on the top or  
bottom of the cabinet.  
Retain this information for  
future reference.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
LVT1340-001A  
[J]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to  
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment  
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave  
all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.  
Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
Caution on volume setting:  
This product incorporates copyright  
Discs produce very little noise compared  
protection technology that is protected  
with other sources. Lower the volume  
by U.S. patents and other intellectual  
before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
property rights. Use of this copyright  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the  
protection technology must be authorized  
output level.  
by Macrovision, and is intended for home  
and other limited viewing uses only unless  
otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
3
How to reset your monitor  
How to read this manual  
The following methods are used to make the  
explanations simple and easy-to-understand:  
Some related tips and notes are explained in  
More about this monitor(see pages  
33 35).  
Button operations are mainly explained with  
the illustrations as follows:  
Press briefly.  
This will reset the microcomputer. Your preset  
adjustments will also be erased.  
Press repeatedly.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
If a disc cannot be recognized by the monitor  
or cannot be ejected...  
Press either one.  
Monitor  
The disc comes  
out.  
Press and hold until  
your desired response  
begins.  
(for about 5 seconds  
while power is on)  
• If this does not work, reset your monitor.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it  
ejects.  
Press and hold both  
buttons at the same  
time.  
4
Contents  
How to reset your monitor.....................  
How to forcibly eject a disc...................  
How to read this manual........................  
4
4
4
DVD/VCD/JPEG special functions... 21  
Selecting audio languages ..................... 21  
Selecting subtitles.................................. 21  
Selecting the multi-angle views............. 21  
Disc menu operations ............................ 22  
Zoom in.................................................. 22  
Precautions.................................... 6  
Widescreen monitor ....................... 7  
Parts identification.................................  
7
On-Screen disc operations............... 23  
Basic on-screen bar operations.............. 24  
Basic control screen operations ............. 26  
List screen operations............................ 27  
Remote controller RM-RK230 ....... 8  
Main elements and features ...................  
8
Headphones KS-HP2.................... 10  
DVD setup menu ............................ 28  
Main elements and features ................... 10  
Basic setting procedure.......................... 28  
Basic operations ............................. 11  
Maintenance.................................. 31  
Language codes.............................. 32  
More about this monitor................. 33  
Troubleshooting ............................. 37  
Specifications................................. 39  
Adjustments .................................. 13  
Using the monitor menu ........................ 13  
Changing the aspect ratio ...................... 15  
Playable discs................................ 17  
Disc operations .............................. 18  
Playing a disc ................................. 18  
Starting playback................................... 18  
Basic operations..................................... 19  
For safety....  
Temperature inside the car....  
Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in  
hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature  
in the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
5
Precautions  
Cautions for handling the liquid crystal panel  
Do not expose the liquid crystal panel to direct  
sunlight.  
Do not drop the liquid crystal panel or strike  
it sharply.  
Storage temperature range: 20°C to +80°C  
(4°F to 176°F)  
+80°C  
–20°C  
–20°C to +80°C  
During the summer,  
temperatures can  
reach as high as  
100°C (212°F).  
When the temperature is very cold or very  
hot, the image may not appear clearly or may  
move slowly.  
The image may not be synchronized with  
the sound or the image quality may decline  
in such environments. Note that this is not a  
malfunction or problem.  
When the liquid crystal panel reaches high  
temperatures or low temperatures, chemical  
changes occur within the liquid crystal panel  
which may cause it to malfunction.  
Usage temperature range: 0°C to +40°C  
(32°F to 104°F)  
The red spots, blue spots and green spots on  
the panel surface are a normal characteristic of  
liquid crystal panels, and not a problem.  
Spots  
C (32°F) or colder  
Note:  
The liquid crystal panel is built with very  
high precision technology and has at least  
99.99% effective image pixels. Be aware that  
on 0.01% of the panel there may be missing or  
constantly lit pixels.  
40°C (104°F) or hotter  
6
Widescreen monitor  
Parts identification  
1
(standby/on) button  
8 Screen (Liquid crystal panel)  
• Turns on the power if pressed.  
• Turns off the power if pressed and held.  
2 Remote sensor  
3 Dome light switch  
See To activate the door sensoron page  
12.  
9 Disc loading slot  
p 0 (eject) button  
q 3 (play) button  
w Disc loading lamp  
e White LED  
r PUSH-OPEN button  
t Screen compartment  
y Screen arm  
4 IR transmitters  
5 Dome lights  
6 Arm lock lever  
7 Reset button  
When you watch the screen at an angle, the picture might not be clear. This is not a malfunction.  
The finest picture can be seen when you watch the screen straight-on.  
7
Remote controller — RM-RK230  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Main elements and features  
MENU  
Before using the remote controller:  
Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the monitor. Make sure  
there is no obstacle in between.  
Remote sensor  
MONITOR CONTROL  
(standby/on) button  
1
Do not expose the remote sensor to strong  
light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
Turns on the power if pressed.  
Turns off the power if pressed and held.  
2 MODE button  
Selects the playback source.  
3 ASPECT button  
Changes the aspect ratio of the screen.  
4 MENU button  
Warning:  
Do not install any battery other than  
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it  
may explode.  
Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
Do not recharge, short, disassemble, or  
heat the battery or dispose of it in a fire.  
Do not leave the battery with other  
metallic materials.  
Calls up the menu, then selects the  
adjustable menu items.  
5
/
buttons  
Adjust the level of the selected item or  
select an appropriate setting for selected  
item.  
Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
Wrap the battery with tape and insulate  
when throwing away or saving it.  
8
DVD/RECEIVER CONTROL  
6 Receiver control buttons*1  
How to select a number  
To select a number from 0 9:  
(standby/on attenuator) button  
SOURCE button  
BAND button  
DUAL button  
VOL + / (2nd VOL +/) buttons  
7 TOP M (menu) button*2  
Displays the DVD and VCD*3 disc menu.  
8 SETUP button*2  
9 SHIFT button  
To select a number greater than 9:  
p Disc basic operation buttons  
7 (stop), 3 (play), 8 (pause)  
3 (play) button functions as ZOOM  
button when pressed with SHIFT button.  
q Advanced disc operation buttons  
/TITLE 5 / *4  
Select the titles (for DVD) or folders  
(for MP3/WMA/JPEG)*5.  
4 / ¢ (reverse skip/forward skip)*6  
1 / ¡ (reverse search/forward  
search)*7  
w OSD button  
Displays the on-screen bar.  
Also functions as /TITLE button when  
pressed with SHIFT button.  
+100/100 buttons used only for searching  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks number greater  
than 99.  
You can directly select folders (for  
MP3/WMA/JPEG) or titles (for DVD)  
using the number buttons (see right  
column).  
e MENU button*2  
Displays the DVD and VCD*3 disc menu.  
r Menu operation buttons*2  
Cursor (% , , @ , #) and ENTER  
t RETURN button*2  
y DVD/VCD special function buttons  
DVD/VCD:  
(audio)  
DVD: (subtitle),  
(angle)  
*1 Controllable only if your car receiver which  
is connected to this monitor is one of the  
JVC receivers.  
*2 These buttons function as the number  
buttons when pressed with SHIFT button.  
*3 Only when PBC is not in use.  
*4 These buttons do not function as PRESET  
5 / .  
*5 These buttons function as the +10/–10  
buttons when pressed with SHIFT button.  
*6 These buttons function as the +100/–100  
buttons when pressed with SHIFT button.  
*7 Not used for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.  
9
Headphones KS-HP2  
You can listen to the playback sounds with  
cordless headphonesKS-HP2.  
Main elements and features  
Left side  
Right side  
Installing the batteries  
VOL  
POWER  
Batteries (R03/AAA)  
supplied only for  
initial setup purpose  
1 IR sensors  
DO NOT cover the IR sensors, as  
reception will become poor.  
2 ON/OFF button  
The power automatically shuts off in the  
following cases:  
The headphones are used for about 4  
hours.  
No signal is received for about 4  
minutes.  
You can turn on the power again by  
pressing the button.  
CAUTIONS:  
The supplied batteries are not rechargeable.  
DO NOT recharge them; otherwise, battery  
leakage or explosion may result.  
Insert the batteries with the correct polarity  
+and “–” to prevent the battery leakage  
or explosion.  
3 POWER lamp  
4 Volume control  
Playback sounds are transmitted through IR  
transmitters to the cordless headphones.  
When using the headphones, set the monitor  
menu item IRto ON.(See page 14.)  
Before using the cordless headphones:  
The headphones give best results when used  
within about 2 m (6.6 feet) from the transmitter.  
These headphones need to receive infrared (IR)  
signals sent from IR transmitters on the monitor.  
Therefore, if you use the headphones where the  
signals cannot be received in a straight line of  
sight, noises may be generated.  
WARNING:  
DO NOT use the headphones while driving.  
Shutting out all outside sounds while driving  
is dangerous and may result in a traffic  
accident.  
IR transmitters  
10  
Basic operations  
Preparation  
Before operating the unit, make sure that all external components are correctly connected and  
installed.  
1
Open the liquid crystal panel.  
Press PUSH-OPEN until the liquid crystal panel is unlocked, then open the liquid crystal  
panel by both hands.  
CAUTION:  
• When not in use, close the liquid crystal panel and store it into the compartment;  
otherwise, it may obstruct the visibility through the rearview mirror.  
• Do not touch the surface of the liquid crystal panel directly.  
When closing the liquid crystal panel, store it in the screen compartment until it is locked.  
To change the monitor position  
You can select a monitor position from the four positions.  
1 Slide the arm lock lever to RELEASE, then pull down or push up the monitor.  
2 Slide the arm lock lever to HOLD, then remove the screen arm to the nearest locking  
position.  
When closing the liquid crystal panel, push up the monitor to the highest position.  
To be continued....  
11  
2
3
Turn on the power.  
Monitor  
Remote control  
Select the playback source.  
MODE  
Each time you press the button, the playback source changes as follows:  
DISC  
AV1  
AV 2  
4
5
Operate the playback source you selected.  
To operate the built-in DVD player, see “Disc operations” on page 18.  
To operate the external components, refer to the manuals for the connected components.  
Adjust the volume on the car receiver.  
When using the headphones, adjust its volume level.  
To turn off the power  
When using the headphones, turn off the power after  
turning off the headphones.  
Monitor  
Remote control  
To activate the door sensor  
OFF: Turns off the dome lights.  
DOOR: Activates the door sensor which turns on the dome lights when a door is open.  
ON:  
Turns on the dome lights.  
12  
Adjustments  
Using the monitor menu  
You can make your own display or sound adjustments using the menu.  
For the adjustable items, see the next page.  
The Remote controllerRM-RK230 has two MENU buttons.  
In this section, using MENU button at MONITOR CONTROL.  
Basic procedure  
1
Call up the menu.  
BRIGHT  
Current menu item  
CONTRAST  
TINT  
COLOR  
IR ON  
DIMMER  
DVD SURROUND OFF  
WHITE LED ON  
Menu selection goes off if other operations are done or no operation is done for about 5  
seconds.  
2
3
4
Select an item you want to adjust.  
MENU  
Adjust the level of the selected item (or select an appropriate setting for the  
selected item).  
Not used for changing the “DVD SURROUND” setting.  
Exit from the menu.  
Press the button repeatedly until the menu is erased.  
MENU  
13  
Adjustable items on the monitor menu  
BRIGHT:  
Adjust this if the picture is too bright or too dark.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
CONTRAST:  
Control the degree of difference between the lightest and darkest parts  
of the picture.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
TINT:  
COLOR:  
IR*:  
Adjust this if the human skin color is unnatural.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
Adjust the color of the picturelighter or darker.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
Set to ONwhen you listen to the playback sounds using the cordless  
headphones.  
Selectable settings: ON, OFF  
Initial setting: ON  
DIMMER:  
Adjust the light of the screen and the white LED when you turn on the  
headlights.  
Adjustable range: 5 to +5  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
DVD SURROUND:  
This function allows you to get a surround effect from your stereo  
system. When connecting a receiver incompatible with the multi-  
channel sources, you can enjoy the virtual surround sound with your  
2-channel stereo system.  
If you turn off the monitor, the setting is initialized.  
Selectable settings: OFF, ACTION, DRAMA, THEATER  
ACTION: Suitable for action movies and sports programs.  
DRAMA: Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy movies in a  
relaxed mood.  
THEATER: Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.  
Initial setting: OFF  
WHITE LED:  
Light on or off the white LED when you turn on the monitor.  
Selectable settings: ON, OFF  
Initial setting: ON  
* Turn off the headphones before changing the IRsetting.  
14  
Changing the aspect ratio  
You can select an appropriate aspect ratio for the playback video signals.  
Basic procedure  
Each time you press the button, aspect ratio change.  
ASPECT  
Changeable aspect ratio  
When incoming 16:9 video signal:  
FULL:  
Pictures are fully shown on the screen.  
In some cases, the black bars may be shown at the top and  
bottom sides of the screen.  
NORMAL:  
JUST:  
Pictures are reduced horizontally.  
The black bars will be shown at the left and right sides of  
the screen.  
In some cases, the black bars may be shown also at the top  
and bottom sides of the screen.  
The middle of pictures are reduced horizontally, and the left  
and right side of the picture enlarged horizontally.  
In some cases, the black bars may be shown at the top and  
bottom sides of the screen.  
ZOOM:  
Pictures are enlarged on the screen so that no black bars will  
be shown on the screen. (The entire picture cannot be shown  
on the screen.)  
To be continued....  
15  
When incoming 4:3 video signal:  
FULL:  
Pictures are enlarged horizontally and are fully shown on the  
screen.  
NORMAL:  
JUST:  
Pictures are shown at the center of the screen.  
The black bars will be shown at the left and right sides of  
the screen.  
Pictures are enlarged horizontally. The extension ratio  
increases toward the both sides of the screen.  
ZOOM:  
Pictures are enlarged on the screen so that no black bars will  
be shown on the screen. (The entire picture cannot be shown  
on the screen.)  
16  
Playable discs  
Discs you can play  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
You can play back the following discs—12 cm  
(4-3/4") and 8 cm (3-3/16")—on the built-in  
DVD player:  
DVD Video: Recorded in NTSC color  
system with Region Code 1(see below).  
DVD-R/DVD-RW recorded in the DVD  
Video format can also be played (see page  
33).  
Video CD (VCD)/audio CD  
MP3/WMA/JPEG: Recorded either in CD-  
R/CD-RW or DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-ROM.  
CD-R/CD-RW: Compliant with ISO 9660  
Level 1, ISO 9660 Level 2, Romeo, and  
Joliet.  
The Non-DVD side of a DualDiscdoes  
not comply with the Compact Disc Digital  
Audiostandard. Therefore, the use of Non-  
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
Digital audio formats  
The unit can play back the following digital  
audio formats.  
Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio,  
the same format used for CDs and most studio  
masters.  
Dolby Digital *2: Compressed digital audio,  
developed by Dolby Laboratories, which  
enables multi-channel encode to create the  
realistic surround sound.  
DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-ROM: Compliant  
with UDF-Bridge Format*1.  
On some discs, the actual operations may be  
different from what is explained in this manual.  
DTS *3 (Digital Theater Systems):  
Compressed digital audio, developed by Digital  
Theater Systems, Inc., which enables multi-  
channel like Dolby Digital. As the compression  
ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it provides  
wider dynamic range and better separation.  
Discs cannot be played back  
DVD-Audio, DVD-ROM (data), DVD-RAM,  
DVD-R/DVD-RW recorded in the DVD-VR  
format, CD-ROM, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo  
CD, etc.  
Playing back these discs will generate noise  
and damage the speakers.  
MPEG Audio: Another compressed digital  
audio which also enables multi-channel encode  
to create the realistic surround sound. However,  
this System downmix the multi-channel signals  
into 2 channels (decoded PCM) and play it  
back.  
Note on Region Code:  
DVD players and DVD Video discs have  
their own Region Code numbers. This unit  
can only play back DVD discs whose Region  
Code numbers include 1.”  
*1 A hybrid file system used to provide  
compatibility with ISO 9660 for accessing  
any type of files on the disc. (UDF stands for  
Universal Disk Format.)  
*2 Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-  
D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
Examples:  
*3 “DTSand DTS 2.0 + Digital Outare  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
If you insert a DVD Video disc of an  
incorrect Region Code  
REGION CODE ERROR!appears on the  
screen. The disc will eject automatically.  
DVD Logois a trademark of DVD Format/  
Logo Licensing Corporation registered in the  
US, Japan and other countries.  
17  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc  
The disc type is automatically detected, and  
playback starts automatically (for DVD:  
automatic start depends on its internal program).  
If “ ” appears on the monitor when  
pressing a button, the disc cannot accept an  
operation you have tried to do.  
In some cases, without showing ,”  
operations will not be accepted.  
If the current disc is an audio CD, CD Text,  
MP3/WMA, JPEG, or VCD without PBC,  
all tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
If a title list or disc menu appears while  
playing a DVD or VCD with PBC, see Disc  
menu operationson page 22.  
Starting playback  
1 Open the liquid crystal panel.  
You can play a disc even if the monitor is  
closed.  
The following marks are used to indicate  
the playable discs....  
2 Turn on the power.  
DVD Video  
Video CD with PBC  
Monitor  
Remote control  
Video CD  
with/without PBC  
Audio CD/  
CD Text  
3 Insert a disc into the loading slot.  
Playback (shining) side facing down  
MP3/WMA disc  
JPEG disc  
All discs listed here  
Before performing any operations, make  
sure the following....  
When a disc is inserted into the loading  
slot, the power comes on, then DISC”  
is selected as the playback source  
automatically.  
For DVD playback, you can change the setup  
menu setting as you like. (See pages 28 30.)  
For DVD/CD playback, using the remote  
controller is more attractive. You can enjoy  
more functions.  
18  
Basic operations  
Operations  
Next operation  
To stop play temporarily  
Playback pauses.  
For JPEG discs: pressing ENTER will also pause the  
picture on the monitor.  
A still picture appears.  
A Frame by frame playback  
B Slow motion playback  
No sound comes out during Slow Motion Playback.  
When playing a VCD, Reverse Slow Motion Playback is  
prohibited.  
To resume normal play:  
To replay the previous  
The playback position moves back about 10 seconds before  
scenesOne Touch Replay the current position.  
This function works only within the same title.  
For some DVDs, this function does not work.  
To stop playback  
When you start playback again, playback  
starts from where it has been stopped  
(Resume play).  
When you start playback again, playback starts from  
the beginning of the last playing track.  
During play, on-screen guide icons appear on the monitor for a while (see page 35).  
To eject the disc  
You can eject the disc even when the monitor is turned off.  
To be continued....  
19  
To go to the next or previous  
chapters/tracks  
To locate a particular title/chapter/  
track directly  
For DVD: During play or pause  
For DVD: During play or pauseselect a  
chapter.  
During stopselect a title.  
For VCD: While PBC (see page 22) is not  
in use.  
To the following  
chapters/tracks.  
For MP3/WMA/JPEG: Select a track  
within the same folder.  
To go back to the beginning of the current  
chapter/track, then the previous chapters/tracks.  
Select the number corresponding to the item  
you want (see page 9).  
To fast-forward or reverse  
the chapter/track  
To locate a title/folder  
Fast-forwards.  
To the next title/folder.  
Reverses.  
To the previous title/folder.  
* The search speed changes to x2 ] x10 for all  
discs (DVD, VCD, CD), but the information  
shown on the monitor is only for DVD/VCD.  
To locate a particular title/  
folder  
To forward or reverse  
search the chapter/track  
Within 10 seconds,  
press the number  
buttons (see page 9).  
The information shown is only for DVD/VCD:  
For MP3/WMA/JPEG discs: To directly  
select the folders using the number button(s),  
it is required that folders be assigned 2 digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder  
names01, 02, 03, and so on.  
To resume normal speed  
20  
DVD/VCD/JPEG special functions  
Selecting subtitles  
Selecting audio languages  
You can select the language of the subtitle  
to be shown on the monitor.  
You can set the initial subtitle language  
using the setup menu (see page 29).  
For DVD:  
You can select the language to listen to if  
the disc has multiple audio languages.  
1/3  
ENGLISH  
1/3  
1/3  
ENGLISH  
1/3  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
Ex.: When the disc has 3 options  
Ex.: When the disc has 3 options  
For VCD:  
You can select the audio channel to  
play. (This is convenient when playing a  
Karaoke VCD.)  
Selecting multi-angle views  
You can view the same scene at different  
angles if the disc has multi-angle views.  
ST  
ST  
1/3  
1
1/3  
ST: To listen to normal stereo (left/right)  
1
playback.  
1/3  
1/3  
L: To listen to the L (left) audio channel.  
1
2
R: To listen to the R (right) audio channel.  
1/3  
3
Ex.: When the disc has 3 multi-angle views  
For some DVDs and VCDs, changing the  
subtitle language, audio language (or audio  
channel) without using the disc menu is  
prohibited.  
21  
Canceling the PBC playback  
1
Disc menu operations  
Menu-driven playback is possible while playing  
back a DVD with menu-driven features or a  
VCD with the PBC (PlayBack Control).  
2 Select a track to start normal playback using  
the number buttons (see page 9).  
While playing a DVD  
To resume the PBC function  
1
A title list or disc menu will appear on the  
monitor.  
Zoom in  
2 Select the item you want on the  
menu.  
1
Selected item starts playback.  
On some discs, you can also select items  
using the corresponding number buttons.  
ZOOM 1  
ZOOM 2  
ZOOM 6  
ZOOM 3  
ZOOM 4  
ZOOM OFF  
ZOOM 5  
For JPEG disc (effective only when  
pausing):  
While playing a VCD  
When a list of items is displayed on the  
monitor.  
ZOOM 1  
ZOOM 2  
ZOOM OFF  
2 Move the zoomed-in portion.  
To select a number greater than 9, see How  
to select a numberon page 9.  
To return to the previous menus  
For JPEG files:  
You cannot move the zoomed-in position  
when the entire picture is displayed on the  
monitor.  
For some discs, you can also move between  
To cancel zoom, select ZOOM OFFin  
the menus by pressing 4 / ¢.  
step 1.  
22  
On-Screen disc operations  
1 Disc type  
2 Audio signal format type (for DVD and  
DTS audio CD)  
PBC (only for VCD)  
3 Playback information  
About the On-Screen Bar  
You can check the disc information and use  
some functions through the on-screen bar.  
For audio CD, CD Text, and MP3/WMA/  
JPEG disc you can also use the control  
screen and list screen (see pages 26 and  
27).  
Current title/chapter  
Current track  
T02-C03  
TRACK 01  
TOTAL  
Elapsed playing time of the disc  
Remaining disc time (for VCD)/  
remaining title time (for DVD)  
T. REM  
On-Screen bars  
TIME  
Elapsed playing time of the  
current chapter/track  
DVD  
Remaining time of the current  
REM  
chapter/track  
4 Playback condition  
2ch  
T02-C03 TOTAL 1:25:58  
DVD-V  
TIME  
TITLE  
CHAP  
OFF  
Playback  
Forward/reverse search  
Forward/reverse slow-motion  
Pause  
VCD  
Stop  
PBC  
TRACK 01 TIME  
REPEAT INTRO RANDOM  
00:36  
VCD  
TIME  
5 Operation icons  
TRACK  
Time indication  
TIME  
Time SearchEnter the elapsed  
playing time of the current title  
or of the disc.  
MP3/WMA  
TITLE  
CHAP  
TRACK  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Track Search  
REPEAT TRACK TIME 00:00:36  
FILE  
REPEAT INTRO RANDOM  
Change the audio language or  
audio channel.  
JPEG  
Change the subtitle language.  
Change the view angle.  
Repeat play (for DVD)  
Repeat play (for other discs)  
Intro play  
OFF  
REPEAT FOLDER  
FILE  
REPEAT  
REPEAT  
INTRO  
Random play  
RANDOM  
CD Text/audio CD  
6 Current playback mode  
*
REPEAT TRACK TIME  
00:36  
5. 1ch  
CD  
REPEAT INTRO RANDOM  
* Only for DTS audio CD  
To be continued....  
23  
To erase the on-screen bar  
Basic on-screen bar operations  
1 Display the on-screen bar.  
For DVD/VCD:  
The on-screen bar for a CD or MP3/WMA/  
JPEG disc automatically disappears in a few  
seconds after the last operation.  
(twice)  
The selectable options for Repeat/Intro/  
Random plays:  
For other discs:  
OFF  
You can repeat the current title or  
chapter.  
2ch  
T02-C03 TOTAL 1:25:58  
DVD-V  
TIME  
DVD (during play or pause):  
TITLE  
CHAP  
OFF  
OFF  
CHAP  
TITLE  
When a JPEG disc is loaded, skip to step 3.  
2 Select an item.  
REPEAT  
You can repeat the current track  
(except for JPEG) or the tracks in  
the current folder (only for MP3/  
WMA/JPEG).  
3 Make a selection.  
VCD (while PBC is not in use):  
REPEAT  
(Canceled)  
If pop-up menu appears....  
1
MP3/WMA:  
REPEAT TRACK  
REPEAT FOLDER  
(Canceled)  
2ch  
T02-C03 TOTAL 1:25:58  
DVD-V  
TIME  
JPEG:  
TITLE  
CHAP  
OFF  
_ _  
(Canceled)  
(Canceled)  
REPEAT FOLDER  
or  
CD Text/audio CD:  
REPEAT TRACK  
2
24  
INTRO  
You can play the first 15 seconds  
of all tracks in the disc, or in the  
current folder (only for MP3/  
WMA).  
To search for a particular point by playing  
time  
For VCD: while PBC is not in use.  
1 Select  
.
2 Enter the elapsed playing time of the current  
VCD (while PBC is not in use):  
title or of the disc.  
INTRO  
(Canceled)  
MP3/WMA:  
INTRO TRACK  
INTRO FOLDER  
(Canceled)  
Ex.: To enter 1 (hours): 02 (minutes): 00  
(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then 0.  
To enter 54 (minutes): 00 (seconds),  
press 0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.  
CD Text/audio CD:  
(Canceled)  
INTRO TRACK  
It is always required to enter the hour  
digit (even 0hour), but it is not required  
to enter trailing zeros (the last two digits  
in the examples above).  
RANDOM  
You can randomly play all tracks  
in the disc, or in the current folder  
(only for MP3/WMA).  
To correct a misentry, press...  
VCD (while PBC is not in use):  
You can also specify the elapsed playing  
RANDOM  
(Canceled)  
time by using % / / @ / #.  
3 Finish the procedure.  
MP3/WMA:  
RANDOM FOLDER  
RANDOM DISC  
(Canceled)  
To search for a particular title/chapter/track  
CD Text/audio CD:  
TITLE  
CHAP  
TRACK  
1 Select  
,
, or  
.
(Canceled)  
RANDOM DISC  
2 Enter the number.  
Refer also page 24 for the following operations.  
To change the time information  
TIME  
1 Select  
.
To correct a misentry, press the number  
2 Change the time information.  
button until the correct number is entered.  
3 Finish the procedure.  
REM 0:11:23  
TOTAL 1:01:58  
TIME 0:00:58  
T. REM 0:35:24  
25  
To select a folder or track  
1 Select Foldercolumn or Trackcolumn  
Basic control screen operations  
You can search for and play the desired items  
through the control screen.  
on the control screen.  
For MP3/WMA/CD Text/audio CD:  
2 Select a folder or track.  
The control screen automatically appears on the  
monitor when you insert a disc.  
If playback does not start,  
press 3 or ENTER.  
JPEG:  
Press TOP M (menu), MENU, or 7.  
For JPEG discs: Pressing ENTER will pause  
Playback stops and the control screen appears.  
the selected picture on the monitor.  
MP3/WMA/JPEG control  
screen  
CD Text/audio CD control  
screen  
REPEAT TRACK TIME  
00:14  
REPEAT TRACK TIME 00:00:14  
Track : 5 / 14  
Folder :  
2 / 3  
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)  
Cloudy  
Fair  
Fog  
Hail  
Indian summer  
Rain  
Shower  
Snow  
Thunder  
Typhoon  
Wind  
01 Music  
02 Music  
03 Music  
Cloudy.mp3  
Fair.mp3  
Fog.mp3  
Hail.wma  
Indian summer.mp3  
Rain.mp3  
Shower.mp3  
Snow.mp3  
Thunder.wma  
Typhoon.mp3  
Wind.mp3  
Track Information  
Album  
Four seasons  
Artist  
Robert M. Smith  
Title  
Rain  
Track Information  
Album  
Weather  
Artist  
Robert M. Smith  
Title  
Winter sky  
Rain  
Winter sky.mp3  
1 Selected playback mode  
2 Elapsed playing time of the current track  
3 Operation mode icon  
Ex.: Control screen for MP3/WMA  
1 Current folder  
2 Current folder number/total folder number  
3 Folder list  
(play), 7 (stop), 8 (pause), ¡ (fast-  
forward), 1 (reverse)  
4 Selected playback mode  
5 Elapsed playing time of the current track  
(only for MP3/WMA)  
4 Current track number/total number of tracks  
on the disc  
5 Track information  
6 Operation mode icon (only for MP3/WMA)  
(play), 7 (stop), 8 (pause)  
6 Track list  
7 Current track (highlighted bar)  
7 Current track number/total number of tracks  
in the current folder (total number of tracks  
on the disc)  
To select a track  
8 Track information (only for MP3/WMA)  
9 Track list  
p Current track (highlighted bar)  
If playback does not start,  
press 3 or ENTER.  
26  
For MP3/WMA/JPEG:  
List screen operations  
While stop...  
You can display the folder list/track list before  
starting play. On this list, you can confirm the  
contents and start playing a disc.  
1 Display the folder list.  
Each time you press the button,  
the list screen comes on and  
goes off.  
Folder/track list  
screens  
2 Select a folder on the list.  
Folder list (MP3/WMA/JPEG)  
Folder : 153/240 Track 154/198  
Page : 4/6  
fol140  
fol141  
fol142  
fol143  
fol144  
fol145  
fol146  
fol147  
fol148  
fol149  
fol150  
fol151  
fol152  
fol153  
fol154  
fol155  
fol156  
fol157  
fol158  
fol159  
fol160  
fol161  
fol162  
fol163  
fol164  
fol165  
fol166  
fol167  
fol168  
fol169  
fol130  
fol131  
fol132  
fol133  
fol134  
fol135  
fol136  
fol137  
fol138  
fol139  
The track list of the selected folder appears.  
To go back to the folder list  
Ex.: Folder list for MP3/WMA  
3 Select a track on the list.  
Track list (MP3/WMA/JPEG/CD Text/audio  
CD)  
Folder : 153/240 Track 154/198  
Page : 4/6  
file0161.wma  
file0162.mp3  
file0163.wma  
file0164.mp3  
file0165.wma  
file0166.wma  
file0167.wma  
file0168.wma  
file0169.mp3  
file0170.wma  
file0131.mp3 file0141.mp3 file0151.wma  
file0132.mp3 file0142.mp3 file0152.mp3  
file0133.wma file0143.mp3 file0153.wma  
file0134.mp3 file0144.mp3 file0154.mp3  
file0135.mp3 file0145.wma file0155.mp3  
file0136.wma file0146.mp3 file0156.mp3  
file0137.wma file0147.wma file0157.mp3  
file0138.mp3 file0148.mp3 file0158.wma  
file0139.mp3 file0149.wma file0159.wma  
file0140.wma file0150.wma file0160.wma  
For JPEG discs: Pressing ENTER will  
pause the selected picture on the monitor.  
For CD Text/audio CD:  
While stop...  
1 Display the track list.  
Each time you press the button,  
the list screen comes on and  
goes off.  
Ex.: Track list for MP3/WMA  
1 Current folder number/total folder number  
(only for MP3/WMA/JPEG)  
2 Select a track on the list.  
2 Current track number/total number of tracks  
in the current folder (for MP3/WMA/JPEG)  
or in the disc (for CD Text/audio CD)  
3 Current page/total number of the pages  
included in the list  
4 Current folder/track (highlighted bar)  
27  
DVD setup menu  
You can store the initial disc playback status.  
While playing, no change can be made on the  
setup menu.  
4
When shipped from the factory, the on-screen  
language is set to English. To change the  
language, see page 29.  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
STREAM/PCM  
DOWN MIX  
STEREO  
DOLBY SURROUND  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
5 Select an option.  
Basic setting procedure  
While stop...  
1
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
STEREO  
DOLBY SURROUND  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
LANGUAGE  
MENU LANGUAGE  
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
SUBTITLE  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
6
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
2
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
DOLBY SURROUND  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
To set other items on the same menu  
Repeat steps 3 to 6.  
Ex.: When selecting the “AUDIO” menu  
To set other items on other menus  
Repeat steps 2 to 6.  
3 Select an item you want to set up.  
To return to the normal screen  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
Ex.: When selecting “DOWN MIX”  
28  
LANGUAGE menu  
Item  
Contents  
Select the initial disc menu language.  
MENU LANGUAGE  
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
SUBTITLE  
Select the initial audio language.  
Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (OFF).  
Select the language for the setup menu and some indications shown on  
the monitor.  
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
For the LANGUAGE settings, see also the language codes list on page 32.  
PICTURE menu  
Item  
Contents  
Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on your  
external monitor.  
16:9 : Select this when the aspect ratio of your monitor is  
16:9.  
MONITOR TYPE  
16:9  
4:3 LETTER BOX  
4:3 LETTER BOX : Select this when the aspect ratio of your  
monitor is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black  
bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.  
4:3 PAN SCAN : Select this when the aspect ratio of your  
monitor is 4:3.  
4:3 PAN SCAN  
While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not  
appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will  
not be shown on the screen.  
Select the on-screen bar position on the monitor.  
1 : Higher position  
2 : Lower position (Help screen under the DVD setup menu  
disappears.)  
OSD POSITION  
Position 1  
Position 2  
If both MP3/WMA files and JPEG files are recorded on a disc,  
you can select which files to play.  
MP3/JPEG  
MP3 : Select this for playing MP3/WMA files.  
JPEG : Select this for playing JPEG files.  
Eject the disc and insert it again to make the new setting  
effective.  
To be continued....  
29  
AUDIO menu  
Item  
Contents  
Select the signal format to be emitted through the DIGITAL OUT  
(Optical) terminal. For details, see page 36.  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
PCM ONLY : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a  
decoder incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio, or  
connecting to a recording device.  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM : Select this when connecting an  
amplifier or a decoder compatible with Dolby Digital.  
STREAM/PCM : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a  
decoder compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio.  
When playing back a multi-channel DVD disc, this setting affects  
the signals reproduced through the analog terminalsAV-OUT and  
cordless headphones (and through the DIGITAL OUT terminal when  
PCM ONLYis selected for DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT).  
DOLBY SURROUND : Select this when you want to enjoy multi-  
channel surround audio by connecting an amplifier compatible with  
Dolby Surround to this monitor.  
DOWN MIX  
STEREO : Normally select this.  
You can enjoy a powerful sound at low or middle volume levels while  
playing a Dolby Digital software.  
D. (Dynamic) RANGE  
COMPRESSION  
AUTO : Select this to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded  
software (excluding 1-channel and 2-channel software).  
ON : Select this to always use this function.  
30  
Maintenance  
To prevent damage to the exterior  
How to handle discs  
Center holder  
Do not apply pesticides, benzine, thinner or  
other volatile substances to the monitor.  
The cabinet surface primarily consists of  
plastic materials.  
When removing a disc from  
its case, press down the center  
holder of the case and lift the  
disc out, holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
Do not wipe with benzine, thinner or similar  
substances because this will results in  
discoloration or removal of the paint.  
When a cloth with a cleansing chemical is  
used, follow the caution points.  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
Do not leave the unit in contact with rubber  
or vinyl products for long periods of time.  
Do not use cleansers which have polishing  
granules because this could damage the  
cabinet.  
Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
To keep discs clean  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe  
it with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
Do not use any solvent (for  
example, conventional record cleaner, spray,  
thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
Clean off dirt by wiping lightly with  
a soft cloth  
When the cabinet is very dirty, wipe with a  
well-wrung cloth dipped in a kitchen cleanser  
(neutral) thinned by water and then go over the  
same surface with a dry cloth.  
(Since there is the possibility of water drops  
getting inside of the unit, do not directly apply  
cleanser to the surface.)  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
To remove these rough spots, rub  
the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
DVD player in the following cases:  
After starting the heater in the car.  
If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the DVD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the  
moisture evaporates.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Warped  
disc  
Sticker  
Sticker  
residue  
Stick-on  
label  
Disc  
31  
Language codes  
Code  
Language  
Code  
Language  
Code  
Language  
AA  
AB  
AF  
AM  
AR  
AS  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BE  
BG  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DZ  
EL  
EO  
ET  
EU  
FA  
FI  
Afar  
IK  
IN  
IS  
IW  
JI  
Inupiak  
RN  
RO  
RW  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SH  
SI  
Kirundi  
Rumanian  
Kinyarwanda  
Sanskrit  
Sindhi  
Sangho  
Serbo-Croatian  
Singhalese  
Slovak  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Ameharic  
Arabic  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Byelorussian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Bengali, Bangla  
Tibetan  
Breton  
Catalan  
Corsican  
Czech  
Welsh  
Bhutani  
Greek  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Basque  
Persian  
Finnish  
Fiji  
Faroese  
Frisian  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Hebrew  
Yiddish  
JW  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
LT  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Greenlandic  
Cambodian  
Kannada  
Korean (KOR)  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
SK  
SL  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Siswati  
Sesotho  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Tamil  
Telugu  
Tajik  
Thai  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Setswana  
Tonga  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
Kirghiz  
Latin  
Lingala  
ST  
Laothian  
Lithuanian  
Latvian, Lettish  
Malagasy  
Maori  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Mongolian  
Moldavian  
Marathi  
Malay (MAY)  
Maltese  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
SU  
SW  
TA  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
TK  
TL  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
TW  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
VO  
WO  
XH  
YO  
ZU  
LV  
MG  
MI  
MK  
ML  
MN  
MO  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
NO  
OC  
OM  
OR  
PA  
PL  
FJ  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
Irish  
Scots Gaelic  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Twi  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
(Afan) Oromo  
Oriya  
Panjabi  
Uzbek  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Wolof  
Xhosa  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
Hindi  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Polish  
PS  
PT  
QU  
RM  
Pashto, Pushto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-Romance  
IE  
32  
More about this monitor  
Basic operations  
Turning off the power  
If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start automatically, next  
time you turn on the power.  
DVD/VCD/JPEG special functions  
For some DVDs and VCDs, changing the  
subtitle language, audio language (or audio  
channel) without using the disc menu is  
prohibited.  
While zoomed in, the picture may look  
coarse.  
Disc operations  
General  
In this manual, words trackand fileare  
interchangeably used when referring to MP3/  
WMA/JPEG files and their file names.  
This unit can also playback 8 cm  
(3-3/16") discs.  
This unit can only playback audio CD (CD-  
DA) files if different type of files are recorded  
in the same disc.  
The first track will be skipped if a different  
type of file is detected first.  
Playing a DVD-R/DVD-RW or CD-R/CD-  
RW  
Use only finalizeddiscs.  
This unit can play back only the files of the  
same type which is first detected if a disc  
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and  
MP3/WMA/JPEG files.  
This unit can play back either MP3/WMA  
files or JPEG files if a disc includes both kind  
of files. Set the playback file type on DVD  
setup menu (page 29) before playing back a  
disc containing both kind of files.  
Only for CD-R/CD-RW: This unit can play  
back multi-session discs; however, unclosed  
sessions will be skipped while playing.  
Some DVD-R/DVD-RW or CD-R/CD-  
RW may not play back on this unit because  
of their disc characteristics, and for the  
following causes:  
When a disc has been loaded, selecting  
DISCfor the playback source starts disc  
play.  
Starting playback  
When a disc is inserted upside down, NO  
DISCappears on the screen, then the disc  
will automatically eject.  
Discs are dirty or scratched.  
Moisture condensation occurs on the lens  
inside the unit.  
You can play a disc even if the monitor is  
closed.  
The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are  
written with Packet Writemethod.  
DVD-R/DVD-RW which are not written  
in UDF-Bridge Format (eg. UDF format or  
ISO format).  
There are improper recording conditions  
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions  
(stain, scratch, warp, etc.).  
DVD-RW/CD-RW may require a longer  
readout time since the reflectance of DVD-  
RW/CD-RW is lower than that of regular  
discs.  
Basic operations  
No sound comes out during slow motion  
playback. When playing a VCD, reverse slow  
motion playback is prohibited.  
One Touch Replay works only within the  
same title. (For some DVDs, this function  
does not work.)  
When playing a DVD/VCD, no sound comes  
out during Search.  
Reverse search stops automatically when it  
reaches the beginning of the disc. Playback  
resumes at normal speed.  
To be continued....  
33  
Do not use the following DVD-R/DVD-RW  
or CD-R/CD-RW:  
This unit can play back the files recorded in  
VBR (variable bit rate).  
Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal  
stuck to the surface.  
Discs on which labels can be directly  
printed by an ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidities may cause malfunctions or  
damages to discs.  
The files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy  
in elapsed time display, and do not show  
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after  
performing the search function, this  
difference becomes noticeable.  
This unit cannot play back the following files:  
MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO  
format.  
MP3 files encoded in an unappropriated  
format.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>  
(regardless of the letter caseupper/lower)  
recorded in either CD-R/CD-RW or in  
DVD-R/DVD-RW.  
This unit can show the names of albums,  
artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,  
1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and WMA  
files.  
This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
WMA files which are not based upon  
Windows Media® Audio.  
WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
WMA files recorded with MBR (Multiple  
Bit Rate) format.  
Files which have the data such as WAVE,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
Playing a JPEG disc  
This unit can play back JPEG files with the  
extension code <.jpg> (regardless of the letter  
caseupper/lower) recorded in either CD-R/  
CD-RW or in DVD-R/DVD-RW.  
Bit rate: MP3: 32 kbps 320 kbps  
WMA: 32 kbps 192 kbps  
Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for WMA)  
Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
The maximum number of characters for file/  
folder names vary among the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
It is recommended that you record a file  
at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file has been  
recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x  
480, it will take a long time to be shown.)  
This System can play only baseline JPEG  
files. Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG  
files cannot be played.  
Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital  
cameras, web, etc.  
ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
Romeo: up to 128 characters  
Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.  
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely  
used now.  
Joliet: up to 64 characters  
Windows long file name: up to 128  
characters  
This unit can recognize the total of  
1100 files, 250 folders (maximum of 999 files  
per folder).  
If progressive or lossless JPEG files are  
played back, a black screen appears. In this  
case, stop playback and select a baseline  
JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to  
select another file.  
34  
Even if you try to pause the current picture,  
it may be skipped, then the next picture will  
pause.  
This unit can recognize the total of 1100  
files, 250 folders (maximum of 999 files per  
folder).  
On-screen guide icons  
During play, the following guide icons may  
appear for a while on the monitor.  
: Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-audio languages (for  
DVD only).  
Changing the source  
If you change the source, playback also stops  
(without ejecting the disc).  
Next time you select DISCfor the playback  
source, disc play starts automatically.  
:
Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-subtitle languages  
(for DVD only).  
: Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-angle views (for  
DVD only).  
Ejecting a disc  
: Play  
If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to prevent it from  
dust. (Disc will not play this time.)  
: Pause  
: Forward slow motion playback  
(for DVD and VCD only)  
: Reverse slow motion playback  
(for DVD only)  
DVD setup menu  
When the language you have selected is not  
recorded on a disc, the original language is  
automatically used as the initial language. In  
addition, for some discs, the initial languages  
settings will not work as you set due to their  
internal disc programming.  
: Forward search  
: Reverse search  
While playing (or pausing), you cannot  
change these languages.  
After you change any of these language  
settings, eject the disc and insert it (or another  
disc) again so that your setting takes effect.  
When you select 16:9for a picture whose  
aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes  
due to the process for converting the picture  
width.  
Even if 4:3 PAN SCANis selected, the  
screen size may become  
4:3 LETTER BOXwith some DVDs. This  
depends on how they are recorded.  
35  
About sounds reproduced through the terminals  
Through the analog terminals (AV-OUT/cordless headphones): 2-channel signal is emitted.  
When playing a multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.  
(AUDIODOWN MIX: see page 30.)  
Through DIGITAL OUT (optical):  
Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted through this  
terminal. (For more details, see table below.)  
To reproduce multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect  
an amplifier or a decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTcorrectly. (See page 30.)  
Output signals through the DIGITAL OUT terminal  
Output signals are different depending on the DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTsetting on the setup  
menu (see page 30).  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
Output Signals  
Playback Disc  
STREAM/PCM  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM  
PCM ONLY  
DVD  
48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM  
96 kHz, Linear PCM  
with DTS  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
DTS bitstream  
Dolby Digital bitstream  
MPEG bitstream  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
DTS bitstream 44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits  
with Dolby Digital  
stereo Linear PCM  
with MPEG Audio  
48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
Audio CD, Video CD  
Audio CD with DTS  
MP3/WMA  
36  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Colored spots (red, blue  
and green) appear on the  
screen.  
This is a characteristic of  
liquid crystal panels and is  
not a malfunction.  
See Noteon page 6.  
No picture appears and  
sound is not heard.  
The cord is not connected  
correctly to the external  
component.  
Connect the cord correctly.  
Correct input mode is not  
selected.  
Select the correct input  
mode.  
The unit does not work at  
all.  
The built-in microcomputer Reset the unit (see page 4).  
may have functioned  
incorrectly due to noise, etc.  
Remote controller does not The battery has lost its  
Install a new battery.  
work.  
charge.  
Cordless headphones do  
not work.  
The sensor is exposed to  
strong light.  
Do not expose the sensor to  
strong light.  
Howling occurs from  
the speakers or the  
headphones.  
It may be caused by a  
camcorder connected to the  
monitor.  
Camcorder is now in  
recording mode. Deactivate  
the recording mode.  
• “NO DISCappears on the Disc is inserted upside  
screen. down.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
CD-R/CD-RW or DVD-R/ CD-R/CD-RW or DVD-R/  
DVD-RW cannot be played DVD-RW is not finalized.  
back.  
Insert a finalized CD-  
R/CD-RW or DVD-R/  
DVD-RW.  
Tracks on the CD-R/  
CD-RW or DVD-R/  
DVD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
Finalize the CD-R/CD-  
RW or DVD-R/DVD-RW  
with the component which  
you used for recording.  
The left and right edges of 4:3 PAN SCANis  
Select 4:3 LETTER BOX.”  
the picture are missing on selected when viewing on  
(See page 29.)  
the screen.  
a conventional TV (aspect  
ratio 4:3).  
37  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Sound and picture are  
sometimes interrupted or  
distorted.  
You are driving on rough  
roads.  
Stop playback while driving  
on rough roads.  
Disc is scratched.  
Change the disc.  
Connections are incorrect.  
Check the cords and  
connections.  
Disc cannot be played  
back.  
No MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks Change the disc.  
are recorded on the disc.  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks do Add the extension code  
not have the extension code <.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.jpg>  
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.jpg> to their file names.  
in their file names.  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks are Change the disc.  
not recorded in a compliant  
format.  
Record MP3/WMA/JPEG  
tracks using a compliant  
application (see page 17).  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks  
are recorded in DVD+R/  
DVD+RW media.  
Change the disc.  
Record MP3/WMA/JPEG  
tracks using DVD-R/DVD-  
RW media.  
Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not Skip to another track or  
an MP3/WMA file (although change the disc. (Do not add  
it has the extension code  
<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
the extension code <.mp3>  
or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
A longer readout time is  
Readout time varies due to  
Do not use too many  
required.  
the complexity of the folder/ hierarchies and folders.  
file configuration.  
Tracks cannot be played  
Playback order is determined  
back as you have intended when the files are recorded.  
them to play.  
Elapsed playing time is not This sometimes occurs  
correct.  
during play. This is caused  
by how the tracks are  
recorded on the disc.  
38  
Specifications  
WIDESCREEN MONITOR  
GENERAL  
Screen:  
Power requirement:  
Operating voltage:  
9 inch liquid crystal panel  
Number of pixel:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
336 960 pixels  
(480 vertical × 234 horizontal × 3)  
Drive method:  
TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix  
format  
Cordless audio:  
Grounding system: Negative ground  
Allowable operating temperature:  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Allowable storage temperature:  
20°C to +80°C (4°F to 176°F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Infrared audio transmitter  
L-channel: 2.3 MHz  
R-channel: 2.8 MHz  
Effective listening angle: 30˚  
Effective range: 2 m (6.6 ft)  
Color system: NTSC  
Input:  
Installation size (approx.):  
215 mm × 49 mm × 374 mm  
(8-1/2" × 1-15/16" × 14-3/4")  
Mass (approx.):  
2.9 kg (6.4 lbs) (excluding accessories)  
CORDLESS HEADPHONES  
Type: Open-air type  
Driver unit:  
30 mm Mylarcone dynamic speaker  
Impedance: 16  
Video: RCA pin × 2 circuits  
1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Audio: RCA pin × 2 circuits  
1.5 V(rms)  
Output:  
Frequency response: 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Infrared wavelength: 850 nm 50 nm  
Power requirements:  
DC 3 V (2.4 V to 3.3 V allowance)  
(R03/AAA battery × 2)  
Mass (approx.):  
Video: RCA pin × 1 circuit  
1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Audio: RCA pin × 1 circuit  
1.5 V(rms)  
DIGITAL OUT: Optical  
170 g (0.38 lbs) (except batteries)  
Allowable operating temperature:  
30°C to +65°C (22°F to 149°F)  
DVD/CD PLAYER SECTION  
Signal detection system: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
Number of channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency response:  
DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:16 Hz to 22 000 Hz  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either  
registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
VCD, CD:  
Dynamic range:  
16 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Signal-to-noise ratio: 95 dB  
Wow and flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3):  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio):  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
39  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Still having trouble??  
USA ONLY  
Call 1-800-252-5722  
http://www.jvc.com  
We can help you!  
EN, SP, FR  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0305MNMMDWJEIN  
KV-MRD900/KV-MR9010  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual de instalación/conexión  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
0305MNMMDWJEIN  
EN, SP, FR  
LVT1340-002A  
[J]  
ENGLISH  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
The illustrations of the widescreen monitor used in this manual  
is of KV-MRD900, unless specified otherwise.  
A menos que se especifique de otro modo, las ilustraciones  
del monitor de pantalla ancha utilizadas en este manual son  
del KV-MRD900.  
Les illustrations du moniteur à écran large utilisées dans ce  
manuel sont du KV-MRD900, sauf spécification contraire.  
WARNING  
ADVERTENCIA  
AVERTISSEMENT  
Installation requires some special knowledge.  
Do not install the monitor yourself. Consult a dealer  
having special knowledge of this kind for safe and  
reliable installation.  
La instalación requiere cierto conocimiento especial.  
No instale el sistema del monitor por sí mismo. Para  
una instalación segura y confiable, consulte con un  
concesionario que tenga conocimientos especiales en  
esta área.  
L’installation nécessite certaines connaissances  
spéciales.  
N’installez pas le moniteur vous-même. Consultez un  
revendeur possédant les connaissances spéciales  
nécessaires pour une installation correcte et sûre.  
• DO NOT INSTALL THE MONITOR IN A LOCATION WHICH  
OBSTRUCTS DRIVING, VISIBILITY, SAFETY DEVICE  
FUNCTION SUCH AS AIR BAGS OR WHICH IS  
PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS.  
If the monitor is installed in a location which obstructs forward  
visibility or operation of the air bag or other safety equipment  
or which interferes with operation of the vehicle, it may cause  
an accident.  
• NEVER USE BOLTS OR NUTS FROM THE VEHICLE’S  
SAFETY DEVICES FOR INSTALLATION.  
If bolts or nuts from the steering wheel, brakes or other safety  
devices are used for installation of the monitor, it may cause  
an accident.  
• NO INSTALE EL MONITOR EN UN LUGAR QUE IMPIDA EL  
MANEJO, LA VISIBILIDAD, EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DE  
DISPOSITIVOS DE SEGURIDAD COMO POR EJEMPLO  
BOLSAS DE AIRE, O DONDE LO PROHÍBAN LAS LEYES  
O REGLAMENTOS LOCALES.  
Si el monitor se instala en un lugar que obstruye la visibilidad  
hacia adelante o la operación de una bolsa de aire u otro  
equipo de seguridad, o que interfiere con la operación del  
vehículo, cerca de la palanca de cambios o pedal del freno  
por ejemplo, podrá causarse un accidente.  
N
INSTALLEZ PAS LE MONITEUR DANS UN ENDROIT OÙ IL  
PEUT GÊNER LA VISIBILITÉ DU CONDUCTEUR OU LE  
FONCTIONNEMENT D UN DISPOSITIF DE SÉCURITÉ TEL  
QUE LES COUSSINS GONFLABLES, OU DANS UN ENDROIT  
INTERDIT PAR LES LOIS ET RÈGLEMENTS EN PLACE.  
Si le moniteur était installé à un emplacement gênant la visibilité  
avant, ou le déploiement du sac à air, et autres dispositifs de  
sécurité, ou à un emplacement gênant pour la conduite du  
véhicule, comme près du levier des vitesses ou de la pédale du  
frein, cela risquerait de provoquer des accidents.  
• NUNCA UTILICE PERNOS O TUERCAS DE LOS  
DISPOSITIVOS DE SEGURIDAD DEL VEHÍCULO PARA  
HACER LA INSTALACIÓN.  
• NE JAMAIS UTILISER POUR L’INSTALLATION DES  
BOULONS OU DES ÉCROUS PROVENANT DES  
DISPOSITIFS DE SÉCURITÉ DU VÉHICULE.  
• ATTACH THE WIRES CORRECTLY.  
If the wiring is not correctly performed, it may cause a fire or  
an accident. In particular, be sure to run and secure the lead  
wire so that it does not get tangled with a screw or the moving  
portion of a seat rail.  
• USE WITH DC 12 V NEGATIVE GROUND VEHICLES.  
This monitor is only for use in a DC 12 V negative ground  
vehicle.  
It cannot be used in large trucks or diesel vehicles which are  
DC 24 V vehicles.  
If it is used in the wrong type of vehicle, it may cause a fire or  
accident.  
• To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you  
disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit. If you are not  
sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a  
qualified technician.  
• Avoid installing the monitor in the following places  
– Where it would hinder your safe driving.  
– Where it would be exposed to direct sunlight or heat directly  
from the heater or placed in an extremely hot place.  
– Where it would be subject to rain, water splashes or  
excessive humidity.  
Si los pernos o tuercas del volante, frenos u otros  
dispositivos de seguridad se utilizan para instalar el monitor  
podrá causarse un accidente.  
• REALICE EL CABLEADO CORRECTAMENTE.  
Si no se hace bien el cableado puede producirse un  
incendio o un accidente. En particular, asegúrese de instalar  
el cable conductor para que éste no quede enredado en un  
tornillo ni en la parte móvil del raíl del asiento.  
• UTILICE EL MONITOR EN VEHÍCULOS DE 12 V CC CON  
PUESTA A TIERRA NEGATIVA.  
Este monitor ha sido diseñado para ser utilizado solamente  
en vehículos de 12 V CC con puesta a tierra negativa.  
No puede utilizarse en camiones grandes ni vehículos diesel  
de 24 V CC.  
Si se utiliza en el tipo equivocado de vehículo se puede  
causar un incendio o accidente.  
• Para evitar cortocircuitos, se recomienda desconectar el  
terminal negativo de la batería y realizar todas las  
conexiones eléctricas antes de instalar la unidad. Si tiene  
dudas sobre cómo realizar la instalación correctamente,  
déjela en manos de un técnico cualificado.  
• Evite instalar el monitor en los siguientes lugares  
– Donde pueda constituir un obstáculo para la conducción.  
– Donde pueda quedar expuesto a la luz solar directa o al  
calor directo de un calefactor, o en un lugar muy caliente.  
– Donde pueda mojarse debido a la lluvia, etc., o en un lugar  
excesivamente húmedo.  
Si l’on utilisait pour l’utilisation du moniteur des boulons et des  
écrous cannibalisés du volant, des freins ou autres dispositifs  
de sécurités, cela risquerait de provoquer des accidents.  
• ATTACHER LES CORDONS CORRECTEMENT.  
Si le câblage n’est pas exécuté correctement, cela risque de  
provoquer un incendie ou autre accident. Veiller, en particulier,  
à tirer et attacher les fils en sorte qu’ils me s’accrochent pas à  
une vis ou ne se coincent dans les parties mobiles des rails  
des sièges.  
• USAGE SUR LES VÉHICULES DE 12 V CC AVEC NÉGATIF  
À LA MASSE.  
Ce moniteur ne peut être utilisé que sur les véhicules de 12 V  
CC avec négatif à la masse.  
Il ne peut pas être utilisé sur les gros camions ou les  
véhicules diesel de 24 V CC.  
S’il était utilisé sur un type de véhicule inadéquat cela  
risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou autres accidents.  
• Pour éviter les courts-circuits, nous recommandons que vous  
déconnectiez la borne négative de la batterie et réalisiez toutes  
les connexions électriques avant d’installer l’appareil. Si vous  
n’êtes pas sûr de savoir comment installer cet appareil  
correctement, faites-le installer par un technicien qualifié.  
• Évitez d’installer le moniteur dans les endroits suivants  
– Où il peut gêner la conduite de la voiture.  
– Où il est exposé à la lumière directe du soleil, à la chaleur  
directe du chauffage ou placé dans un endroit très chaud.  
– Où il est sujet à la pluie, aux éclaboussures ou à une  
humidité excessive.  
– Where it would be subject to dust.  
– Where it would be positioned on an unstable place.  
– Where it could damage the car’s fittings.  
– Where proper ventilation would not be maintained.  
CAUTION  
– En un lugar polvoriento.  
– En un sitio inestable.  
– Donde pueda producir daños en los herrajes del automóvil.  
– Donde no se pueda mantener una ventilación adecuada.  
– Où il est sujet à la poussière.  
– Où il est positionné dans un endroit instable.  
– Où il peut endommager les accessoires de la voiture.  
– Où une ventilation correcte ne peut pas être maintenue.  
Since there may be legal regulations defining the  
permissible installation locations for the monitor which differ  
by country or by state, be sure to install the color monitor in  
a location complying with any such laws.  
PRECAUCIÓN  
ATTENTION  
Puesto que pueden haber normas legales que definen los  
lugares de instalación permisibles para el monitor, que  
difieren según los países o estados, asegúrese de instalar  
el monitor color en un sitio que cumpla con los requisitos  
establecidos por tales leyes.  
Puisqu’il peut y avoir des réglementations définissant les  
emplacements d’installation autorisés pour un moniteur et  
que celles-ci peuvent varier d’un pays ou d’une région à  
l’autre, assurez-vous d’installer le moniteur couleur dans un  
endroit conforme à ces lois.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided with this unit.  
After checking them, please set them correctly.  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et  
Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión  
Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas.  
Después de inspeccionarlas, colóquelas correctamente.  
raccordement  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil.  
Après vérification, veuillez les placer correctement.  
Cordless headphones (supplied only with KV-MRD900)  
Auriculares inalámbricos (suministrados solamente con KV-MRD900)  
Casque d’écoute sans fil (fourni uniquement avec le KV-MRD900)  
Joint cord  
Cable de empalme  
Cordon de raccordement  
KS-HP2  
Batteries  
Pilas  
Remote controller  
Piles  
Control remote  
Widescreen monitor  
Télécommande  
Monitor de pantalla ancha  
Moniteur à écran large  
Battery  
Pila  
Pile  
R03/AAA  
Power cord  
Cordón de alimentación  
Cordon d’alimentation  
Paper template  
Plantilla de papel  
Gabarit en papier  
RM-RK230  
CR2025  
Nuts (M5): x 12  
Tuercas (M5): x 12  
Écrous (M5): x 12  
Spacers: silver–9 mm (3/8"): x 2  
Espaciadores: plateado–9 mm (3/8 pulgada): x 2  
Intercalaire argent–9 mm (3/8 po.): x 2  
Screws–M5 x 10 mm (7/16"): x 12  
Tornillos–M5 x 10 mm (7/16 pulgada): x 12  
Vis–M5 x 10 mm (7/16 po.): x 12  
Base plate  
Placa de base  
Plaque de base  
Spacers: black–7 mm (5/16"): x 4  
Espaciadores: negro–7 mm (5/16 pulgada): x 4  
Intercalaire noire–7 mm (5/16 po.): x 4  
Screws–M5 x 14 mm (5/8"): x 6  
Tornillos–M5 x 14 mm (5/8 pulgada): x 6  
Vis–M5 x 14 mm (5/8 po.): x 6  
Flat washer–ø 5 mm (1/4"): x 12  
Arandela plana–ø 5 mm (1/4 pulgada): x 12  
Rondelle plate–ø 5 mm (1/4 po.): x 12  
Shroud  
Refuerzo  
Socle de montage au plafond  
Screws–M5 x 23 mm (15/16"): x 6  
Tornillos–M5 x 23 mm (15/16 pulgada): x 6  
Vis–M5 x 23 mm (15/16 po.): x 6  
Slide plates  
Placas deslizantes  
Plaques latérales  
– 1 –  
INSTALLATION  
Lillustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique.  
Cependant, vous devez faire les ajustements correspondant à  
votre voiture particulière. Si vous avez des questions ou avez  
besoin d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre  
revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie  
INSTALLATION  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. However,  
you should make adjustments corresponding to your specific  
car. If you have any questions or require information regarding  
installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a  
company supplying kits.  
INSTALACIÓN  
La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Sin  
embargo usted deberá efectuar los ajustes correspondientes  
a su automóvil. Si tiene alguna pregunta o necesita  
información acerca de las herramientas para instalación,  
consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio  
para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales  
herramientas.  
d’approvisionnement.  
Detaching the dome light cover / Desmontaje de la cubierta de la luz del techo / Détachement du couvercle du plafonnier  
To mount the widescreen monitor, detach the dome light covers.  
As illustrated, depress the two portions on the cover indicated by  
the marks 5 (1), then pull off the cover (2).  
1
Para instalar el monitor de pantalla ancha, desmonte las cubiertas  
de la luz del techo.  
1
Tal como se muestra en la ilustración, haga presión sobre las dos  
partes de la cubierta indicadas por las flechas 5 (1) y, a  
continuación, retire la cubierta (2).  
Pour monter le moniteur à écran large, détachez les couvercles du  
plafonnier.  
Comme montré sur l’illustration, faites pression sur les deux  
parties sur le couvercle marquées par 5 (1), puis retirez le  
couvercle (2).  
2
Montaje del monitor de pantalla ancha  
Montage du moniteur à écran large  
Mounting the widescreen monitor  
El procedimiento de instalación varía según los diferentes  
vehículos. Lo siguiente es sólo un ejemplo. Para los detalles  
del procedimiento, consulte las páginas correspondientes.  
Se recomienda que el sistema de monitor sea instalado  
por un técnico cualificado.  
La procédure d’installation varie d’une voiture à l’autre. La  
procédure qui suit est un exemple. Pour en savoir plus, référez-  
vous à la page de droite.  
Il est recommandé de faire installer le système de moniteur  
par un technicien qualifié.  
Installation procedure varies among cars. The following is an  
example. For detailed procedure, see the right page.  
It is recommended to have the monitor system installed by  
a qualified technician.  
Widescreen monitor  
Monitor de pantalla ancha  
Moniteur à écran large  
1
*
*1 Nuts (M5): x 12  
Tuercas (M5): x 12  
Écrous (M5): x 12  
Ceiling panel  
Panel del techo  
Panneau de plafond  
TV tuner, etc.  
Sintonizador de TV, etc.  
Tuner de télévision, etc.  
Ceiling reinforcement crosspieces  
Travesaños de refuerzo del techo  
Traverses de renforcement du plafond  
1
*
Car receiver, etc.  
Slide plates  
Placas deslizantes  
Plaques latérales  
Receptor de automóvil, etc.  
Récepteur d’autoradio, etc.  
2
*
*2 Screws–M5 x 10 mm (7/16"): x 12  
Tornillos–M5 x 10 mm (7/16 pulgada): x 12  
Vis–M5 x 10 mm (7/16 po.): x 12  
Before mounting the monitor, make sure that the screws do not  
reach the ceiling panel.  
Base plate  
Placa de base  
Plaque de base  
2
*
Antes de instalar el monitor, asegúrese de que los tornillos no  
lleguen al panel del techo.  
Avant de monter le moniteur, assurez-vous que les vis  
n’atteignent pas le panneau du plafond.  
When NOT using the shroud/Cuando NO se utiliza el refuerzo/Lorsque  
le socle de montage au plafond N’est PAS utilisé  
*3 Flat washer–ø 5 mm (1/4"): x 6  
2
*
Arandela plana–ø 5 mm (1/4 pulgada): x 6  
Rondelle plate–ø 5 mm (1/4 po.): x 6  
These should not be used if the monitor position after  
installed seems so low that it may interfere with visibility  
through the rearview mirror.  
When using the shroud/Cuando se utiliza el refuerzo/Lors de  
l’utilisation du socle de montage au plafond  
*4 Spacers: black–7 mm (5/16"): x 4  
3
4
*
5
*
*
Espaciadores: negro–7 mm (5/16 pulgada): x 4  
Intercalaire noire–7 mm (5/16 po.): x 4  
No se deberán utilizar estos elementos si existe la  
posibilidad de que el monitor, una vez instalado, quede en  
una posición muy baja y obstaculice la visibilidad a través  
del espejo retrovisor.  
*5 Spacers: silver–9 mm (3/8"): x 2  
Espaciadores: plateado–9 mm (3/8 pulgada): x 2  
Intercalaire argent–9 mm (3/8 po.): x 2  
Cette partie ne doit pas être utilisée si la position du moniteur  
après l’installation paraît si basse qu’elle pourrait gêner la  
visibilité du conducteur dans le rétroviseur.  
Shroud  
Refuerzo  
Socle de montage au plafond  
*6 Flat washer–ø 5 mm (1/4"): x 6  
Arandela plana–ø 5 mm (1/4 pulgada): x 6  
Rondelle plate–ø 5 mm (1/4 po.): x 6  
*7 Screws–M5 x 14 mm (5/8"): x 6  
Widescreen monitor  
Monitor de pantalla ancha  
Moniteur à écran large  
or M5 x 23 mm (15/16"): x 6–when using the shroud  
Tornillos–M5 x 14 mm (5/8 pulgada): x 6  
o M5 x 23 mm (15/16 pulgada): x 6–cuando se utiliza el refuerzo  
Vis–M5 x 14 mm (5/8 po.): x 6  
6
*
7
*
ou M5 x 23 mm (15/16 po.): x 6–lors de l’utilisation du socle de montage au  
plafond  
– 2 –  
Before mounting the monitor to the ceiling:  
• Perform the required external connections first (see reverse  
page).  
• Wear goggles or protective eyewear to protect your eyes  
especially while drilling the holes.  
Antes de instalar el monitor en el techo:  
Efectúe primero las conexiones externas requeridas (véase el  
reverso).  
• Utilice gafas o una máscara de protección para proteger sus  
ojos, especialmente mientras taladra los orificios.  
• Preste especial atención para no dañar el interior, los herrajes  
y el techo de su vehículo.  
Avant de fixer le moniteur au plafond:  
• Réalisez d’abord les connexions extérieures nécessaires (voir  
la page de dos).  
• Portez des lunettes étanches ou un article de lunetterie  
spécialisé pour protéger vos yeux, et plus spécialement  
pendant le perçage des trous.  
• Faites attention de ne pas endommager l’intérieur de la  
voiture et ses garnitures, ainsi que son plafond.  
• Pay attention not to damage the car interior and its fittings and  
the ceiling of your car.  
2
3
4
1
5
Paper template  
Plantilla de papel  
Gabarit en papier  
6 7 8  
7
1 Retire del techo, la luz del techo y el revestimiento  
1 Remove the dome light and interior headliner  
1 Retirez le plafonnier et la garniture intérieure du  
interior.  
from the ceiling.  
plafond.  
2 Arme las placas laterales y la placa de base.  
• Determine en primer lugar, la posición de instalación del  
monitor y el largo de los paneles laterales combinados.  
2 Assemble the slide plates and the base plate.  
• Determine the monitor installation position and length of  
combined slide panels first.  
2 Assemblez les plaques latérales avec la plaque de  
base.  
• Déterminez d’abord la position d’installation du moniteur  
et la longueur des panneaux latéraux combinés.  
3 Fije las placas armadas a los travesaños de  
refuerzo del techo.  
3 Attach the assembled plates to the ceiling  
reinforcement crosspieces.  
3 Attachez les plaques assemblées sur les  
Taladre cuatro orificios en los travesaños de refuerzo del  
techo, de manera que coincidan con los orificios de  
montaje de las placas armadas.  
• Drill the four holes in the ceiling reinforcement crosspieces  
to meet the mounting holes of the assembled plates.  
traverses de renforcement du plafond.  
• Percez quatre trous dans les travers de renforcement du  
plafond au niveau des trous de montage des plaques  
assemblées.  
4 Finish wiring then attach the interior headliner.  
4 Realice el cableado y coloque el revestimiento  
interior.  
5 Cut off the headliner using the supplied paper  
4 Terminez le câblage puis attachez la garniture  
template.  
intérieure.  
5 Corte el revestimiento interior utilizando la  
plantilla de papel suministrada.  
6 Connect the harness and plugs from the ceiling to  
the monitor.  
5 Coupez la garniture en utilisant le gabarit en  
6 Conecte el cableado preformado y las clavijas  
entre el techo y el monitor.  
papier fourni.  
• For wiring and connections, see the reverse side.  
• Para los detalles sobre el cableado y las conexiones,  
véase al dorso.  
7 Attach the shroud and the monitor to the base  
plate.  
6 Connectez le harnais et les fiches du plafond au  
moniteur.  
• When using the shroud, the supplied spacers should be  
inserted to be kept the appropriate distance between the  
base plate and the shroud.  
• Pour le câblage et les connexions, référez-vous à la page  
de dos.  
7 Fije el refuerzo y el monitor a la placa de base.  
• Cuando utilice el refuerzo, se deberán insertar los  
espaciadores entregados para poder mantener una  
distancia apropiada entre la placa de base y el refuerzo.  
Si los espaciadores y tornillos suministrados no pueden  
mantener la distancia apropiada entre el revestimiento  
interior y el monitor, modifique los espaciadores y  
tornillos (o consígase otros del largo apropiado).  
If the supplied spacers and screws cannot keep the  
appropriate distance between the headliner and the  
monitor, modify the spacers and screws (or obtain those of  
the appropriate length).  
7 Attachez le socle de montage au plafond et le  
moniteur sur la plaque de base.  
• Les intercalaires fournies peuvent être utilisées si une  
certaine distance doit être maintenue entre la plaque de  
base et le socle de montage au plafond.  
8 After mounting the monitor, attach the dome light  
Si les intercalaires et les vis fournies ne permettent pas de  
maintenir la distance appropriée entre la garniture et le  
moniteur, modifiez les intercalaires ou les vis (ou  
munissez-vous d’intercalaires et de vis de la longueur  
appropriée).  
covers.  
8 Tras realizar el montaje del monitor, fije las  
cubiertas de la luz del techo.  
8 Après avoir monté le moniteur, attachez les  
couvercles du plafonnier.  
– 3 –  
ENGLISH  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS  
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES  
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de  
débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous  
les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil. Si l’on  
n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le  
faire installer par un technicien qualifié.  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el  
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections  
before installing the unit. If you are not sure how to install this  
unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
terminal negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las  
conexiones eléctricas antes de instalar la unidad. Si usted no  
está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad, hágala  
instalar por un técnico cualificado.  
Note:  
Nota:  
Remarque:  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE  
ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this  
system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased  
at JVC car audio dealers.  
Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC,  
con sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo  
no posee este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión,  
que puede ser adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de  
equipos de audio para automóviles.  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de  
courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule  
n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur  
de tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un revendeur  
d’autoradios JVC.  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified ratings. If the fuse  
blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada.  
Si el fusible se quemase frecuentemente, consulte con su  
concesionario car audio de JVC.  
Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible  
saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
Typical Connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.  
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from  
the car body may be different in color.  
Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le  
câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut  
endommager sérieusement l’appareil.  
Les fils du cordon d’alimentation et du cordon du plafonnier et  
ceux du connecteur provenant de la voiture peuvent être de  
couleur différente.  
del vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños  
graves en la unidad.  
Los conductores del cordón de alimentación y el cordón de la  
luz del techo y de los conectores procedentes de la  
carrocería del vehículo podrían ser diferentes en color.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord to the car  
battery, the car light control switch, and the door sensor in  
the following sequence.  
1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de  
alimentación a la batería del automóvil, al interruptor de  
control de las luces del automóvil, y al sensor de la puerta,  
en la secuencia siguiente.  
1
Connectez les fils de couleur du cordon d  
batterie de la voiture, au commutateur d éclairage et capteur de  
porte, dans l ordre suivant.  
alimentation à la  
1 Black: ground  
2 Yellow: to car battery (constant 12 V)  
3 Red: to an accessory terminal  
4 Orange: to car light control switch  
1 Noir: à la masse  
1 Negro: a tierra  
2 Jaune: à la batterie de la voiture (12 V constant)  
3 Rouge: à la prise accessoire  
2 Amarillo: a la batería del automóvil (12 V constantes)  
3 Rojo: a un terminal de accesorio  
4 Naranja: al interruptor de control de las luces del  
automóvil  
DOMELIGHT  
4 Orange: au commutateur d’éclairage de la voiture  
5 Gray with red stripe: to the door sensor (DOOR SW)  
6 Black with red stripe: ground (DOMELIGHT)  
7 Yellow with red stripe: to car battery (constant 12 V)  
DOMELIGHT  
5 Gris à bande rouge: au capteur de porte (DOOR SW)  
6 Noir à bande rouge: à la masse (DOMELIGHT)  
7 Jaune à bande rouge: à la batterie de la voiture (12 V  
constant)  
DOMELIGHT  
5 Gris con rayas rojas: al sensor de la puerta (DOOR SW)  
6 Negro con rayas rojas: a tierra (DOMELIGHT)  
2 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
• Using the joint cord makes the connection/disconnection  
easier.  
7
Amarillo con rayas rojas: a la batería del automóvil (12 V  
constantes)  
2 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.  
Lutilisation du cordon prolongateur d’alimentation rend la  
connexion/déconnexion plus facile.  
2 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.  
• El uso del cable prolongador de alimentación facilita la  
conexión/desconexión.  
Joint cord  
Cable de empalme  
Cordon de raccordement  
2
1
Ignition switch  
Interruptor de encendido  
Interrupteur d’allumage  
2
*
Black / Negro / Noir  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis du véhicule  
2
1
2
*
Yellow*1  
Amarillo*1  
Jaune*1  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch)  
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del automóvil (desviando el  
interruptor de encendido)  
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture (en dérivant  
l’interrupteur d’allumage)  
5 A fuse  
Red  
Rojo  
Fusible de 5 A  
Fuse block  
Bloque de fusibles  
Porte-fusible  
Fusible 5 A  
Rouge  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
3
3 A fuse  
Fusible de 3 A  
Fusible 3 A  
Orange  
Naranja  
Orange  
To car light control switch  
Al interruptor de control de las luces del automóvil  
Au commutateur d’éclairage de la voiture  
*1 Before checking the operation of this  
unit prior to installation, this lead must  
be connected, otherwise power  
cannot be turned on.  
4
*2 Not included with this unit.  
*2 No suministrado con esta unidad.  
*2 Non fourni avec cet appareil.  
Gray with red stripe  
Gris con rayas rojas  
Gris à bande rouge  
*1 Antes de comprobar el  
funcionamiento de esta unidad previa  
a de la instalación, es necesario  
conectar este cable, de lo contrario  
no se podrá conectar la alimentación.  
*1 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet  
appareil avant installation, ce fil doit  
être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut  
pas être mis sous tension.  
To the door sensor  
Al sensor de la puerta  
Au capteur de porte  
5
6
Black with red stripe  
Negro con rayas rojas  
Noir à bande rouge  
2
*
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis du véhicule  
2
*
1 A fuse  
Fusible de 1 A  
Fusible 1 A  
Yellow with red stripe  
Amarillo con rayas rojas  
Jaune à bande rouge  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch)  
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del automóvil (desviando el  
interruptor de encendido)  
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture (en dérivant  
l’interrupteur d’allumage)  
7
To disconnect the harness, unlock the harness using the screw driver or a similar tool, then pull out  
the harness. (Detach the dome light cover prior to this.)  
2
Para desconectar el mazo de conductores, desbloquéelo con un destornillador o herramienta similar  
y seguidamente, extráigalo. (Antes de realizar esto, retire la cubierta de la luz del techo).  
Pour déconnecter le harnais, déverrouillez le harnais en utilisant un tournevis ou un outil similaire,  
puis tirez sur le harnais. (Détachez le plafonnier avant de le faire.)  
1
– 4 –  
Connecting the leads / Conexión de los conductores / Raccordement des fils  
Twist the core wires when connecting.  
Retuerce los alambres de alma para  
conectarlos.  
Torsader les âmes des fils en les  
raccordant.  
CAUTION / PRECAUCIÓN / ATTENTION:  
To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads  
with insulating tape.  
Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con cinta  
aislante.  
Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont  
PAS utilisés avec de la bande isolante.  
Solder the core wires to connect them securely.  
Suelde los alambres de alma para conectarlos con  
firmeza.  
Souder les âmes des fils pour les raccorder entre  
eux de façon sûre.  
CONNECTING TO THE RECEIVER AND  
EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
CONEXION AL RECEPTOR Y A LOS  
COMPONENTES EXTERNOS  
CONNEXION DE LAUTORADIO ET DES  
APPAREILS EXTÉRIEURS  
DO NOT connect the AV1-IN and AV2-INPUT plugs on the  
monitor to the LINE OUT or SUBWOOFER plugs of the car  
receiver.  
NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fiches AV1-IN et AV2-INPUT du  
moniteur aux fiches LINE OUT ou SUBWOOFER de  
l’autoradio.  
NO conecte las clavijas AV1-IN y AV2-INPUT del monitor a las  
clavijas LINE OUT o SUBWOOFER del receptor para  
automóvil.  
For KV-MRD900 / Para KV-MRD900 / Pour le KV-MRD900  
See also “About sounds reproduced through the terminals” on page 36 of the INSTRUCTIONS.  
Consulte también “Acerca de los sonidos reproducidos a través de los terminales traseros” en la página 36 de las  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.  
Audio/video control amplifier or the decoder compatible with the  
multichannel digital sources  
Amplificador de control de audio/vídeo o el decodificador compatibles  
con las fuentes digitales multicanal  
Référez-vous aussi à “À propos des sons reproduits par les prises” à la page 36 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.  
Amplificateur de commande audio/vidéo ou décodeur compatible avec les  
sources numériques multicanaux  
Digital optical cable (not supplied)  
Cable óptico digital (no suministrado)  
DIGITAL OUT  
Câble optique numérique (non fourni)  
3
*
AV-OUT  
(or equivalent terminal)  
LINE IN  
(o terminal equivalente)  
(ou prise équivalente)  
Car receiver  
Receptor para automóvil  
Récepteur d’autoradio  
AV1-IN  
KV-MRD900  
2nd monitor  
2do. monitor  
2d. moniteur  
When using the TV tuner system KV-C1000  
Cuando se utiliza el sistema de sintonizador de TV KV-C1000  
Lors de l’utilisation du tuner de télévision KV-C1000  
AV2-INPUT  
Rear panel  
Panel trasero  
Panneau  
arrière  
Antenna elements (supplied with KV-C1000)  
Elementos de antena (suministrados con KV-C1000)  
Éléments d’antenne (fournis avec le KV-C1000)  
KS-HP2  
4
*
4
*
3
*
3
*
Remote sensor unit  
(supplied with KV-C1000)  
Unidad de sensor remoto  
(suministrada con  
Playback source / Fuente de reproducción / Source de lecture  
KV-C1000)  
Capteur de télécommande  
(fourni avec le KV-C1000)  
VCR (KV-V8 or KZ-V10)  
VCR (KV-V8 o KZ-V10)  
Magnétoscope (KV-V8 ou KZ-V10)  
Camcorder  
Videocámera  
Caméscope  
KV-C1000  
*3 Cordon à fiches cinch (non fourni)  
*4 Cordon vidéo (non fourni)  
*3 Cable con clavija monopolar RCA (no suministrado)  
*3 RCA pin plug cord (not supplied)  
*4 Video cord (not supplied)  
*4 Cordón de vídeo (no suministrado)  
– 5 –  
For KV-MR9010 / Para KV-MR9010 / Pour le KV-MR9010  
Si l’autoradio est muni d’une fiche 2nd AUDIO OUT  
Cuando el receptor está equipado con la clavija 2nd AUDIO  
OUT  
• When the receiver is equipped with the 2nd AUDIO OUT plug  
3
*
AV-OUT  
LINE IN  
2nd monitor  
2do. monitor  
2d. moniteur  
VIDEO OUT  
4
*
2nd AUDIO OUT  
AV1-IN  
Car receiver (ex. JVC KD-ADV6160)  
3
*
Receptor para automóvil (ej. JVC KD-ADV6160)  
Récepteur d’autoradio (ex. JVC KD-ADV6160)  
KV-MR9010  
AV2-INPUT  
Rear panel  
Panel trasero  
Panneau  
When using the TV tuner system KV-C1000  
Cuando se utiliza el sistema de sintonizador de TV KV-C1000  
Lors de l’utilisation du tuner de télévision KV-C1000  
4
*
arrière  
KS-HP2  
3
*
(not supplied)  
(no suministrados)  
(non fourni)  
Playback source / Fuente de reproducción / Source de lecture  
Camcorder  
Videocámera  
Caméscope  
VCR (KV-V8 or KZ-V10)  
VCR (KV-V8 o KZ-V10)  
Magnétoscope (KV-V8 ou KZ-V10)  
KV-C1000  
Si vous souhaitez augmenter le niveau du casque d’écoute,  
augmentez d’abord le niveau de sortie de la prise 2nd AUDIO  
OUT sur l’autoradio, puis ajustez le niveau du casque d’écoute  
sur le casque.  
• Référez-vous aussi au MANUEL D’INSTRUCTION de votre  
autoradio.  
When increasing the headphones level, first increase output  
level of the 2nd AUDIO OUT on the receiver, then adjust the  
headphones level on the headphones.  
Cuando aumente el nivel de los auriculares, primero aumente  
el nivel de salida de 2nd AUDIO OUT en el receptor y, a  
continuación, ajuste el nivel de auriculares en los auriculares.  
Consulte también las MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES de su  
receptor para automóvil.  
• Refer also to the INSTRUCTIONS of your car receiver.  
• Si l’autoradio N’est PAS muni de fiches 2nd AUDIO OUT  
Cuando el receptor NO está equipado con la clavija 2nd AUDIO  
OUT  
• When the receiver is NOT equipped with the 2nd AUDIO OUT  
plug  
3
*
AV-OUT  
LINE IN  
2nd monitor  
VIDEO OUT  
2do. monitor  
2d. moniteur  
4
*
Car receiver (ex. JVC KD-DV5100)  
AV1-IN  
Receptor para automóvil (ej. JVC KD-DV5100)  
Récepteur d’autoradio (ex. JVC KD-DV5100)  
KV-MR9010  
When using the TV tuner system KV-C1000  
Cuando se utiliza el sistema de sintonizador de TV KV-C1000  
Lors de l’utilisation du tuner de télévision KV-C1000  
AV2-INPUT  
Rear panel  
Panel trasero  
Panneau  
4
*
arrière  
KS-HP2  
3
*
(not supplied)  
(no suministrados)  
(non fourni)  
Playback source / Fuente de reproducción / Source de lecture  
Camcorder  
Videocámera  
Caméscope  
VCR (KV-V8 or KZ-V10)  
VCR (KV-V8 o KZ-V10)  
Magnétoscope (KV-V8 ou KZ-V10)  
KV-C1000  
*3 RCA pin plug cord (not supplied)  
*4 Video cord (not supplied)  
*3 Cordon à fiches cinch (non fourni)  
*4 Cordon vidéo (non fourni)  
*3 Cable con clavija monopolar RCA (no suministrado)  
*4 Cordón de vídeo (no suministrado)  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
The fuse blows.  
El fusible se quema.  
Le fusible saute.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados? * Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?  
Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
No es posible conectar la alimentación.  
* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?  
Lappareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
Picture does not come on screen.  
* Is the correct input selected?  
La imagen no aparece en la pantalla.  
* ¿Se ha seleccionado la entrada correcta?  
Aucune image napparaît sur l’écran.  
* Lentrée correcte est-elle choisie?  
Dome lights cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow and red stripe lead connected?  
Las luces del techo no se encienden.  
* ¿Está conectado el conductor de rayas rojas y amarillas?  
Le plafonnier ne peut pas être allumé.  
* Le fil à bandes jaune et rouge est-il connecté?  
This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
La unidad no funciona para nada.  
* ¿Reinicializó su unidad?  
Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
– 6 –  
9-INCH WIDESCREEN MONITOR WITH DVD PLAYER  
9-ZOLL-BREITBILDMONITOR MIT DVD-PLAYER  
MONITEUR COULEUR A ECRAN LARGE DE 9 POUCES AVEC  
LECTEUR DE DVD  
9-INCH BREEDBEELD-MONITOR MET DVD-SPELER  
KV-MRD900  
This system cannot receive television broadcasts. Use the separately sold TV tuner unit KV-C1001 for  
optional television broadcast reception.  
Dieses System kann keine Fernsehsignale empfangen. Verwenden Sie den separat erhältlichen  
Fernsehtuner KV-C1001, um Fernsehsignale zu empfangen.  
Ce système ne peut pas recevoir les émissions de télévision . Utilisez le module de tuner de télévision  
mobile KV-C1001 vendu séparément afin de pouvoir recevoir les émissions de télévision.  
Met dit systeem kunt u geen televisie-uitzendingen ontvangen. Gebruik de los verkrijgbare draagbare,  
KV-C1001 TV-tuner voor ontvangst van televisie-uitzendingen.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.  
Pour linstallation et les raccordements, référez-vous au manuel séparé.  
Bijzonderheden over de installatie en aansluiting van het apparaat vindt u in de desbetreffende handleiding.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING  
LVT1341-001A  
[E]  
WARNINGS  
CAUTION:  
• DO NOT INSTALL THE MONITOR IN A  
LOCATION WHICH OBSTRUCTS DRIVING,  
VISIBILITY, SAFETY DEVICE FUNCTION  
SUCH AS AIR BAGS OR WHICH IS  
PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAWS AND  
REGULATIONS.  
This monitor should be used on DC 12 V only. To  
prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, DO NOT  
use any other power source.  
Installation requires some special  
knowledge.  
Do not install the monitor yourself.  
Consult a dealer having special  
knowledge of this kind for safe and  
reliable installation.  
• There may be legal regulations defining the  
permissible installation locations for the monitor  
which differ by country or by state. Be sure  
to install the monitor in a correct location  
according to such laws.  
• The driver must not operate the monitor while  
driving.  
* Stop your vehicle in a safe location when  
operating the monitor.  
• The driver must not watch the television or  
playback pictures while driving.  
If the driver does it while driving, it may lead to  
carelessness and cause an accident.  
Keep the monitor at an appropriate sound level  
while driving.  
Driving with the sound at a level that prevents  
you from hearing sounds outside of and around  
the vehicle may cause an accident.  
Be sure not to let the monitor fall or be strongly  
impacted since this may cause a malfunction or  
fire.  
Do not use the monitor with the engine off.  
Doing so with the engine off will consume  
battery power and may prevent the engine from  
CAUTIONS on the supplied headphones  
—KS-HP2:  
• DO NOT leave the headphones in a place  
exposed to direct sunlight for a long  
time, such as a dashboard, as they may be  
damaged.  
• Keep the headphones away from a cellular  
phone to avoid interference.  
• DO NOT turn off the power with the  
volume set at high level, as the sudden  
blast of sound can damage your hearing  
and/or headphones next time you use the  
headphones.  
starting.  
• If you experience a ringing in your  
ears, reduce volume or stop using the  
headphones.  
When not in use, close the liquid crystal panel  
and store it into the compartment.  
Do not touch the surface of the liquid crystal  
panel directly.  
Do not hang any object on the monitor or hang  
down, as this may damage the monitor.  
2
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to  
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave  
all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.  
Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Caution on volume setting:  
This product incorporates copyright  
Discs produce very little noise compared  
protection technology that is protected  
with other sources. Lower the volume  
by U.S. patents and other intellectual  
before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
property rights. Use of this copyright  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the  
protection technology must be authorized  
output level.  
by Macrovision, and is intended for home  
and other limited viewing uses only unless  
otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
3
How to reset your monitor  
How to read this manual  
The following methods are used to make the  
explanations simple and easy-to-understand:  
Some related tips and notes are explained in  
More about this monitor(see pages  
33 35).  
Button operations are mainly explained with  
the illustrations as follows:  
Press briefly.  
This will reset the microcomputer. Your preset  
adjustments will also be erased.  
Press repeatedly.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
If a disc cannot be recognized by the monitor  
or cannot be ejected...  
Press either one.  
Monitor  
The disc comes  
out.  
Press and hold until  
your desired response  
begins.  
(for about 5 seconds  
while power is on)  
• If this does not work, reset your monitor.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it  
ejects.  
Press and hold both  
buttons at the same  
time.  
4
Contents  
How to reset your monitor.....................  
How to forcibly eject a disc...................  
How to read this manual........................  
4
4
4
DVD/VCD/JPEG special functions... 21  
Selecting audio languages ..................... 21  
Selecting subtitles.................................. 21  
Selecting the multi-angle views............. 21  
Disc menu operations ............................ 22  
Zoom in.................................................. 22  
Precautions.................................... 6  
Widescreen monitor ....................... 7  
Parts identification.................................  
7
On-Screen disc operations............... 23  
Basic on-screen bar operations.............. 24  
Basic control screen operations ............. 26  
List screen operations............................ 27  
Remote controller RM-RK230 ....... 8  
Main elements and features ...................  
8
Headphones KS-HP2.................... 10  
DVD setup menu ............................ 28  
Main elements and features ................... 10  
Basic setting procedure.......................... 28  
Basic operations ............................. 11  
Maintenance.................................. 31  
Language codes.............................. 32  
More about this monitor................. 33  
Troubleshooting ............................. 37  
Specifications................................. 39  
Adjustments .................................. 13  
Using the monitor menu ........................ 13  
Changing the aspect ratio ...................... 15  
Playable discs................................ 17  
Disc operations .............................. 18  
Playing a disc ................................. 18  
Starting playback................................... 18  
Basic operations..................................... 19  
For safety....  
Temperature inside the car....  
Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in  
hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature  
in the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
5
Precautions  
Cautions for handling the liquid crystal panel  
Do not expose the liquid crystal panel to direct  
sunlight.  
Do not drop the liquid crystal panel or strike  
it sharply.  
Storage temperature range: 20°C to +80°C  
+80°C  
–20°C  
–20°C to +80°C  
During the summer,  
temperatures can  
reach as high as  
100°C.  
When the temperature is very cold or very  
hot, the image may not appear clearly or may  
move slowly.  
The image may not be synchronized with  
the sound or the image quality may decline  
in such environments. Note that this is not a  
malfunction or problem.  
When the liquid crystal panel reaches high  
temperatures or low temperatures, chemical  
changes occur within the liquid crystal panel  
which may cause it to malfunction.  
Usage temperature range: 0°C to +40°C  
The red spots, blue spots and green spots on  
the panel surface are a normal characteristic of  
liquid crystal panels, and not a problem.  
Spots  
C or colder  
Note:  
The liquid crystal panel is built with very  
high precision technology and has at least  
99.99% effective image pixels. Be aware that  
on 0.01% of the panel there may be missing or  
constantly lit pixels.  
40°C or hotter  
6
Widescreen monitor  
Parts identification  
1
(standby/on) buttons  
8 Screen (Liquid crystal panel)  
• Turns on the power if pressed.  
• Turns off the power if pressed and held.  
2 Remote sensor  
3 Dome light switch  
See To activate the door sensoron page  
12.  
9 Disc loading slot  
p 0 (eject) button  
q 3 (play) button  
w Disc loading lamp  
e White LED  
r PUSH-OPEN button  
t Screen compartment  
y Screen arm  
4 IR transmitters  
5 Dome lights  
6 Arm lock lever  
7 Reset button  
When you watch the screen at an angle, the picture might not be clear. This is not a malfunction.  
The finest picture can be seen when you watch the screen straight-on.  
7
Remote controller — RM-RK230  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Main elements and features  
MENU  
Before using the remote controller:  
Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the monitor. Make sure  
there is no obstacle in between.  
Remote sensor  
MONITOR CONTROL  
(standby/on) button  
1
Do not expose the remote sensor to strong  
light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
Turns on the power if pressed.  
Turns off the power if pressed and held.  
2 MODE button  
Selects the playback source.  
3 ASPECT button  
Changes the aspect ratio of the screen.  
4 MENU button  
Warning:  
Do not install any battery other than  
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it  
may explode.  
Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
Do not recharge, short, disassemble, or  
heat the battery or dispose of it in a fire.  
Do not leave the battery with other  
metallic materials.  
Calls up the menu, then selects the  
adjustable menu items.  
5
/
buttons  
Adjust the level of the selected item or  
select an appropriate setting for selected  
item.  
Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
Wrap the battery with tape and insulate  
when throwing away or saving it.  
8
DVD/RECEIVER CONTROL  
6 Receiver control buttons*1  
How to select a number  
To select a number from 0 9:  
(standby/on attenuator) button  
SOURCE button  
BAND button  
DUAL button  
VOL + / (2nd VOL + / ) buttons  
7 TOP M (menu) button*2  
Displays the DVD and VCD*3 disc menu.  
8 SETUP button*2  
9 SHIFT button  
To select a number greater than 9:  
p Disc basic operation buttons  
7 (stop), 3 (play), 8 (pause)  
3 (play) button functions as ZOOM  
button when pressed with SHIFT button.  
q Advanced disc operation buttons  
/TITLE 5 / *4  
Select the titles (for DVD) or folders  
(for MP3/WMA/JPEG)*5.  
4 / ¢ (reverse skip/forward skip)*6  
1 / ¡ (reverse search/forward  
search)*7  
w OSD button  
Displays the on-screen bar.  
Also functions as the /TITLE button  
when pressed with SHIFT button.  
You can directly select folders (for  
MP3/WMA/JPEG) or titles (for DVD)  
using the number buttons (see right  
column).  
+100/100 buttons used only for searching  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks number greater  
than 99.  
e MENU button*2  
Displays the DVD and VCD*3 disc menu.  
r Menu operation buttons*2  
Cursor (% , , @ , #) and ENTER  
t RETURN button*2  
y DVD/VCD special function buttons  
DVD/VCD:  
(audio)  
DVD: (subtitle),  
(angle)  
*1 Controllable only if your car receiver which  
is connected to this monitor is one of the  
JVC receivers.  
*2 These buttons function as the number  
buttons when pressed with SHIFT button.  
*3 Only when PBC is not in use.  
*4 These buttons do not function as PRESET  
5 / .  
*5 These buttons function as the +10/–10  
buttons when pressed with SHIFT button.  
*6 These buttons function as the +100/–100  
buttons when pressed with SHIFT button.  
*7 Not used for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.  
9
Headphones KS-HP2  
You can listen to the playback sounds with  
cordless headphonesKS-HP2.  
Main elements and features  
Left side  
Right side  
Installing the batteries  
Batteries (R03/AAA)  
supplied only for  
initial setup purpose  
VOL  
POWER  
1 IR sensors  
DO NOT cover the IR sensors, as  
reception will become poor.  
2 ON/OFF button  
The power automatically shuts off in the  
following cases:  
The headphones are used for about 4  
hours.  
No signal is received for about 4  
minutes.  
CAUTIONS:  
The supplied batteries are not rechargeable.  
DO NOT recharge them; otherwise, battery  
leakage or explosion may result.  
Insert the batteries with the correct polarity  
+and “–” to prevent the battery leakage  
or explosion.  
You can turn on the power again by  
pressing the button.  
3 POWER lamp  
4 Volume control  
Playback sounds are transmitted through IR  
transmitters to the cordless headphones.  
When using the headphones, set the monitor  
menu item IRto ON.(See page 14.)  
Before using the cordless headphones:  
The headphones give best results when used  
within about 2 m from the transmitter.  
These headphones need to receive infrared (IR)  
signals sent from IR transmitters on the monitor.  
Therefore, if you use the headphones where the  
signals cannot be received in a straight line of  
sight, noises may be generated.  
WARNING:  
DO NOT use the headphones while driving.  
Shutting out all outside sounds while driving  
is dangerous and may result in a traffic  
accident.  
IR transmitters  
10  
Basic operations  
Preparation  
Before operating the unit, make sure that all external components are correctly connected and  
installed.  
1
Open the liquid crystal panel.  
Press PUSH-OPEN until the liquid crystal panel is unlocked, then open the liquid crystal  
panel by both hands.  
CAUTION:  
• When not in use, close the liquid crystal panel and store it into the compartment;  
otherwise it may obstruct the visibility through the rearview mirror.  
• Do not touch the surface of the liquid crystal panel directly.  
When closing the liquid crystal panel, store it in the screen compartment until it is locked.  
To change the monitor position  
You can select a monitor position from the four positions.  
1 Slide the arm lock lever to RELEASE, then pull down or push up the monitor.  
2 Slide the arm lock lever to HOLD, then remove the screen arm to the nearest locking  
position.  
When closing the liquid crystal panel, push up the monitor to the highest position.  
To be continued....  
11  
2
3
Turn on the power.  
Monitor  
Remote control  
Select the playback source.  
MODE  
Each time you press the button, the playback source changes as follows:  
DISC  
AV1  
AV 2  
4
5
Operate the playback source you selected.  
To operate the built-in DVD player, see “Disc operations” on page 18.  
To operate the external components, refer to the manuals for the connected components.  
Adjust the volume on the car receiver.  
When using the headphones, adjust its volume level.  
To turn off the power  
When using the headphones, turn off the power after  
turning off the headphones.  
Monitor  
Remote control  
To activate the door sensor  
OFF: Turns off the dome lights.  
DOOR: Activates the door sensor which turns on the dome lights when a door is open.  
ON:  
Turns on the dome lights.  
12  
Adjustments  
Using the monitor menu  
You can make your own display or sound adjustments using the menu.  
For the adjustable items, see the next page.  
The Remote controllerRM-RK230 has two MENU buttons.  
In this section, using MENU button at MONITOR CONTROL.  
Basic procedure  
1
Call up the menu.  
BRIGHT  
Current menu item  
CONTRAST  
TINT  
COLOR  
IR ON  
DIMMER  
DVD SURROUND OFF  
NTSC / PAL PAL  
WHITE LED ON  
Menu selection goes off if other operations are done or no operation is done for about 5  
seconds.  
2
3
4
Select an item you want to adjust.  
MENU  
Adjust the level of the selected item (or select an appropriate setting for the  
selected item).  
Not used for changing the “DVD SURROUND” setting.  
Exit from the menu.  
Press the button repeatedly until the menu is erased.  
MENU  
13  
Adjustable items on the monitor menu  
BRIGHT:  
Adjust this if the picture is too bright or too dark.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
CONTRAST:  
Control the degree of difference between the lightest and darkest parts of  
the picture.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
TINT:  
COLOR:  
IR*:  
Adjust this if the human skin color is unnatural.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
Adjust the color of the picturelighter or darker.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
Set to ONwhen you listen to the playback sounds using the cordless  
headphones.  
Selectable settings: ON, OFF  
Initial setting: ON  
DIMMER:  
Adjust the light of the screen and the white LED when you turn on the  
headlights.  
Adjustable range: 5 to +5  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
DVD SURROUND:  
This function allows you to get a surround effect from your stereo  
system. When connecting a receiver incompatible with the multi-channel  
sources, you can enjoy the virtual surround sound with your 2-channel  
stereo system.  
If you turn off the monitor, the setting is initialized.  
Selectable settings: OFF, ACTION, DRAMA, THEATER  
ACTION: Suitable for action movies and sports programs.  
DRAMA: Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy movies in a  
relaxed mood.  
THEATER: Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.  
Initial setting: OFF  
NTSC/PAL:  
Select the color system to match to the incoming signals.  
Selectable settings: PAL, NTSC  
Initial setting: PAL  
Turn off then on the power to activate a new setting when you change the  
setting.  
WHITE LED:  
Light on or off the white LED when you turn on the monitor.  
Selectable settings: ON, OFF  
Initial setting: ON  
* Turn off the headphones before changing the IRsetting.  
14  
Changing the aspect ratio  
You can select an appropriate aspect ratio for the playback video signals.  
Basic procedure  
Each time you press the button, aspect ratio change.  
ASPECT  
Changeable aspect ratio  
When incoming 16:9 video signal:  
FULL:  
Pictures are fully shown on the screen.  
In some cases, the black bars may be shown at the top and  
bottom sides of the screen.  
NORMAL:  
JUST:  
Pictures are reduced horizontally.  
The black bars will be shown at the left and right sides of  
the screen.  
In some cases, the black bars may be shown also at the top  
and bottom sides of the screen.  
The middle of pictures are reduced horizontally, and the left  
and right side of the picture enlarged horizontally.  
In some cases, the black bars may be shown at the top and  
bottom sides of the screen.  
ZOOM:  
Pictures are enlarged on the screen so that no black bars will  
be shown on the screen. (The entire picture cannot be shown  
on the screen.)  
To be continued....  
15  
When incoming 4:3 video signal:  
FULL:  
Pictures are enlarged horizontally and are fully shown on the  
screen.  
NORMAL:  
JUST:  
Pictures are shown at the center of the screen.  
The black bars will be shown at the left and right sides of  
the screen.  
Pictures are enlarged horizontally. The extension ratio  
increases toward the both sides of the screen.  
ZOOM:  
Pictures are enlarged on the screen so that no black bars will  
be shown on the screen. (The entire picture cannot be shown  
on the screen.)  
16  
Playable discs  
Discs you can play  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
You can play back the following discs12 cm  
and 8 cmon the built-in DVD player:  
DVD Video: Recorded in the PAL color  
system with Region Code 2(see below).  
DVD-R/DVD-RW recorded in the DVD  
Video format can also be played (see page  
33).  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does  
not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital  
Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-  
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
Digital audio formats  
The unit can play back the following digital  
audio formats.  
Video CD (VCD)/audio CD  
MP3/WMA/JPEG: Recorded either in CD-  
R/CD-RW or DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-ROM.  
CD-R/CD-RW: Compliant with ISO 9660  
Level 1, ISO 9660 Level 2, Romeo, and  
Joliet.  
Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio,  
the same format used for CDs and most studio  
masters.  
DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-ROM: Compliant  
with UDF-Bridge Format*1.  
Dolby Digital *2: Compressed digital audio,  
developed by Dolby Laboratories, which  
enables multi-channel encode to create the  
realistic surround sound.  
On some discs, the actual operations may be  
different from what is explained in this manual.  
DTS *3 (Digital Theater Systems):  
Discs cannot be played back  
Compressed digital audio, developed by Digital  
Theater Systems, Inc., which enables multi-  
channel like Dolby Digital. As the compression  
ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it provides  
wider dynamic range and better separation.  
DVD-Audio, DVD-ROM (data), DVD-RAM,  
DVD-R/DVD-RW recorded in the DVD-VR  
format, CD-ROM, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo  
CD, etc.  
Playing back these discs will generate noise  
and damage the speakers.  
MPEG Audio: Another compressed digital  
audio which also enables multi-channel encode  
to create the realistic surround sound. However,  
this System downmix the multi-channel signals  
into 2 channels (decoded PCM) and play it  
back.  
Note on Region Code:  
DVD players and DVD Video discs have  
their own Region Code numbers. This unit  
can only play back DVD discs whose Region  
Code numbers include 2.”  
*1 A hybrid file system used to provide  
compatibility with ISO 9660 for accessing  
any type of files on the disc. (UDF stands for  
Universal Disk Format.)  
Examples:  
*2 Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-  
D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
*3 “DTSand DTS 2.0 + Digital Outare  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
If you insert a DVD Video disc of an  
incorrect Region Code  
REGION CODE ERROR!appears on the  
screen. The disc will eject automatically.  
DVD Logois a trademark of DVD Format/  
Logo Licensing Corporation registered in the  
US, Japan and other countries.  
17  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc  
The disc type is automatically detected, and  
playback starts automatically (for DVD:  
automatic start depends on its internal program).  
If “ ” appears on the monitor when  
pressing a button, the disc cannot accept an  
operation you have tried to do.  
In some cases, without showing ,”  
operations will not be accepted.  
If the current disc is an audio CD, CD Text,  
MP3/WMA, JPEG, or VCD without PBC,  
all tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
If a title list or disc menu appears while  
playing a DVD or VCD with PBC, see Disc  
menu operationson page 22.  
Starting playback  
1 Open the liquid crystal panel.  
You can play a disc even if the monitor is  
closed.  
The following marks are used to indicate  
the playable discs....  
2 Turn on the power.  
DVD Video  
Video CD with PBC  
Monitor  
Remote control  
Video CD  
with/without PBC  
Audio CD/  
CD Text  
3 Insert a disc into the loading slot.  
Playback (shining) side facing down  
MP3/WMA disc  
JPEG disc  
All discs listed here  
Before performing any operations, make  
sure the following....  
When a disc is inserted into the loading  
slot, the power comes on, then DISC”  
is selected as the playback source  
automatically.  
For DVD playback, you can change the setup  
menu setting as you like. (See pages 28 30.)  
For DVD/CD playback, using the remote  
controller is more attractive. You can enjoy  
more functions.  
18  
Basic operations  
Operations  
Next operation  
To stop play temporarily  
Playback pauses.  
For JPEG discs: pressing ENTER will also pause the  
picture on the monitor.  
A still picture appears.  
A Frame by frame playback  
B Slow motion playback  
No sound comes out during Slow Motion Playback.  
When playing a VCD, Reverse Slow Motion Playback is  
prohibited.  
To resume normal play:  
To replay the previous  
The playback position moves back about 10 seconds before  
scenesOne Touch Replay the current position.  
This function works only within the same title.  
For some DVDs, this function does not work.  
To stop playback  
When you start playback again, playback  
starts from where it has been stopped  
(Resume play).  
When you start playback again, playback starts from  
the beginning of the last playing track.  
During play, on-screen guide icons appear on the monitor for a while (see page 35).  
To eject the disc  
You can eject the disc even when the monitor is turned off.  
To be continued....  
19  
To go to the next or previous  
chapters/tracks  
To locate a particular title/chapter/  
track directly  
For DVD: During play or pause  
For DVD: During play or pauseselect a  
chapter.  
During stopselect a title.  
For VCD: While PBC (see page 22) is not  
in use.  
To the following  
chapters/tracks.  
For MP3/WMA/JPEG: Select a track  
within the same folder.  
To go back to the beginning of the current  
chapter/track, then the previous chapters/tracks.  
Select the number corresponding to the item  
you want (see page 9).  
To fast-forward or reverse  
the chapter/track  
To locate a title/folder  
Fast-forwards.  
To the next title/folder.  
Reverses.  
To the previous title/folder.  
* The search speed changes to x2 ] x10 for all  
discs (DVD, VCD, CD), but the information  
shown on the monitor is only for DVD/VCD.  
To locate a particular title/  
folder  
To forward or reverse  
search the chapter/track  
Within 10 seconds,  
press the number  
buttons (see page 9).  
The information shown is only for DVD/VCD:  
For MP3/WMA/JPEG discs: To directly  
select the folders using the number button(s),  
it is required that folders be assigned 2 digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder  
names01, 02, 03, and so on.  
To resume normal speed  
20  
DVD/VCD/JPEG special functions  
Selecting subtitles  
Selecting audio languages  
You can select the language of the  
subtitle to be shown on the monitor.  
You can set the initial subtitle  
language using the setup menu (see  
page 29).  
For DVD:  
You can select the language to listen to if  
the disc has multiple audio languages.  
1/3  
ENGLISH  
1/3  
1/3  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
1/3  
ENGLISH  
Ex.: When the disc has 3 options  
For VCD:  
Ex.: When the disc has 3 options  
You can select the audio channel to  
play. (This is convenient when playing a  
Karaoke VCD.)  
Selecting multi-angle views  
You can view the same scene at different  
angles if the disc has multi-angle views.  
ST  
ST  
1/3  
1
1/3  
ST: To listen to normal stereo (left/right)  
1
playback.  
L: To listen to the L (left) audio channel.  
1/3  
1/3  
1
2
R: To listen to the R (right) audio channel.  
1/3  
3
Ex.: When the disc has 3 multi-angle views  
For some DVDs and VCDs, changing the  
subtitle language, audio language (or audio  
channel) without using the disc menu is  
prohibited.  
21  
Canceling the PBC playback  
1
Disc menu operations  
Menu-driven playback is possible while playing  
back a DVD with menu-driven features or a  
VCD with the PBC (PlayBack Control).  
2 Select a track to start normal playback using  
the number buttons (see page 9).  
While playing a DVD  
To resume the PBC function  
1
A title list or disc menu will appear on the  
monitor.  
Zoom in  
2 Select the item you want on the  
menu.  
1
Selected item starts playback.  
On some discs, you can also select items  
using the corresponding number buttons.  
ZOOM 1  
ZOOM 2  
ZOOM 6  
ZOOM 3  
ZOOM 4  
ZOOM OFF  
ZOOM 5  
For JPEG disc (effective only when  
pausing):  
While playing a VCD  
When a list of items is displayed on the  
monitor.  
ZOOM 1  
ZOOM 2  
ZOOM OFF  
2 Move the zoomed-in portion.  
To select a number greater than 9, see How  
to select a numberon page 9.  
For JPEG files:  
To return to the previous menus  
You cannot move the zoomed-in position  
when the entire picture is displayed on the  
monitor.  
To cancel zoom, select ZOOM OFFin  
For some discs, you can also move between  
the menus by pressing 4 / ¢.  
step 1.  
22  
On-Screen disc operations  
1 Disc type  
2 Audio signal format type (for DVD and  
DTS audio CD)  
PBC (only for VCD)  
3 Playback information  
About the On-Screen Bar  
You can check the disc information and use  
some functions through the on-screen bar.  
For audio CD, CD Text, and MP3/WMA/  
JPEG disc you can also use the control  
screen and list screen (see pages 26 and  
27).  
Current title/chapter  
Current track  
T02-C03  
TRACK 01  
TOTAL  
Elapsed playing time of the disc  
Remaining disc time (for VCD)/  
remaining title time (for DVD)  
T. REM  
On-Screen bars  
TIME  
Elapsed playing time of the  
current chapter/track  
DVD  
Remaining time of the current  
REM  
chapter/track  
4 Playback condition  
2ch  
T02-C03 TOTAL 1:25:58  
DVD-V  
TIME  
TITLE  
CHAP  
OFF  
Playback  
Forward/reverse search  
Forward/reverse slow-motion  
Pause  
VCD  
Stop  
PBC  
TRACK 01 TIME  
REPEAT INTRO RANDOM  
00:36  
VCD  
TIME  
5 Operation icons  
TRACK  
Time indication  
TIME  
Time SearchEnter the elapsed  
playing time of the current title  
or of the disc.  
MP3/WMA  
TITLE  
CHAP  
TRACK  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Track Search  
REPEAT TRACK TIME 00:00:36  
FILE  
REPEAT INTRO RANDOM  
Change the audio language or  
audio channel.  
JPEG  
Change the subtitle language.  
Change the view angle.  
Repeat play (for DVD)  
Repeat play (for other discs)  
Intro play  
OFF  
REPEAT FOLDER  
FILE  
REPEAT  
REPEAT  
INTRO  
Random play  
6 Current playback mode  
RANDOM  
CD Text/audio CD  
*
REPEAT TRACK TIME  
00:36  
5. 1ch  
CD  
REPEAT INTRO RANDOM  
* Only for DTS audio CD  
To be continued....  
23  
To erase the on-screen bar  
Basic on-screen bar operations  
1 Display the on-screen bar.  
The on-screen bar for a CD or MP3/WMA/  
JPEG disc automatically disappears in a few  
seconds after the last operation.  
For DVD/VCD:  
(twice)  
The selectable options for Repeat/Intro/  
Random plays:  
For other discs:  
OFF  
You can repeat the current title or  
chapter.  
DVD (during play or pause):  
2ch  
T02-C03 TOTAL 1:25:58  
DVD-V  
TIME  
OFF  
CHAP  
TITLE  
TITLE  
CHAP  
OFF  
When a JPEG disc is loaded, skip to step 3.  
2 Select an item.  
REPEAT  
You can repeat the current track  
(except for JPEG) or the tracks in  
the current folder (only for MP3/  
WMA/JPEG).  
3 Make a selection.  
VCD (while PBC is not in use):  
REPEAT  
(Canceled)  
If pop-up menu appears....  
1
MP3/WMA:  
REPEAT TRACK  
REPEAT FOLDER  
(Canceled)  
JPEG:  
2ch  
T02-C03 TOTAL 1:25:58  
DVD-V  
TIME  
TITLE  
CHAP  
OFF  
(Canceled)  
(Canceled)  
REPEAT FOLDER  
_ _  
or  
CD Text/audio CD:  
REPEAT TRACK  
2
24  
INTRO  
You can play the first 15 seconds  
of all tracks in the disc, or in the  
current folder (only for MP3/  
WMA).  
To search for a particular point by playing  
time  
For VCD: while PBC is not in use.  
1 Select  
.
2 Enter the elapsed playing time of the current  
VCD (while PBC is not in use):  
title or of the disc.  
INTRO  
(Canceled)  
MP3/WMA:  
INTRO TRACK  
INTRO FOLDER  
(Canceled)  
Ex.: To enter 1 (hours): 02 (minutes): 00  
(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then 0.  
To enter 54 (minutes): 00 (seconds),  
press 0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.  
CD Text/audio CD:  
(Canceled)  
INTRO TRACK  
It is always required to enter the hour  
digit (even 0hour), but it is not required  
to enter trailing zeros (the last two digits  
in the examples above).  
RANDOM  
You can randomly play all tracks  
in the disc, or in the current folder  
(only for MP3/WMA).  
To correct a misentry, press...  
VCD (while PBC is not in use):  
You can also specify the elapsed playing  
RANDOM  
(Canceled)  
time by using % / / @ / #.  
3 Finish the procedure.  
MP3/WMA:  
RANDOM FOLDER  
RANDOM DISC  
(Canceled)  
To search for a particular title/chapter/track  
CD Text/audio CD:  
TITLE  
CHAP  
TRACK  
1 Select  
,
, or  
.
(Canceled)  
RANDOM DISC  
2 Enter the number.  
Refer also page 24 for the following operations.  
To change the time information  
TIME  
1 Select  
.
To correct a misentry, press the number  
2 Change the time information.  
button until the correct number is entered.  
3 Finish the procedure.  
REM 0:11:23  
TOTAL 1:01:58  
TIME 0:00:58  
T. REM 0:35:24  
25  
To select a folder or track  
1 Select Foldercolumn or Trackcolumn  
Basic control screen operations  
You can search for and play the desired items  
through the control screen.  
on the control screen.  
For MP3/WMA/CD Text/audio CD:  
2 Select a folder or track.  
The control screen automatically appears on the  
monitor when you insert a disc.  
If playback does not start,  
press 3 or ENTER.  
JPEG:  
Press TOP M (menu), MENU, or 7.  
For JPEG discs: Pressing ENTER will pause  
Playback stops and the control screen appears.  
the selected picture on the monitor.  
MP3/WMA/JPEG control  
screen  
CD Text/audio CD control  
screen  
REPEAT TRACK TIME  
00:14  
REPEAT TRACK TIME 00:00:14  
Track : 5 / 14  
Folder :  
2 / 3  
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)  
Cloudy  
Fair  
Fog  
Hail  
Indian summer  
Rain  
Shower  
Snow  
Thunder  
Typhoon  
Wind  
01 Music  
02 Music  
03 Music  
Cloudy.mp3  
Fair.mp3  
Fog.mp3  
Hail.wma  
Indian summer.mp3  
Rain.mp3  
Shower.mp3  
Snow.mp3  
Thunder.wma  
Typhoon.mp3  
Wind.mp3  
Track Information  
Album  
Four seasons  
Artist  
Robert M. Smith  
Title  
Rain  
Track Information  
Album  
Weather  
Artist  
Robert M. Smith  
Title  
Rain  
Winter sky  
Winter sky.mp3  
1 Selected playback mode  
2 Elapsed playing time of the current track  
3 Operation mode icon  
Ex.: Control screen for MP3/WMA  
1 Current folder  
2 Current folder number/total folder number  
3 Folder list  
(play), 7 (stop), 8 (pause), ¡ (fast-  
forward), 1 (reverse)  
4 Selected playback mode  
5 Elapsed playing time of the current track  
(only for MP3/WMA)  
4 Current track number/total number of tracks  
on the disc  
5 Track information  
6 Operation mode icon (only for MP3/WMA)  
(play), 7 (stop), 8 (pause)  
6 Track list  
7 Current track (highlighted bar)  
7 Current track number/total number of tracks  
in the current folder (total number of tracks  
on the disc)  
To select a track  
8 Track information (only for MP3/WMA)  
9 Track list  
p Current track (highlighted bar)  
If playback does not start,  
press 3 or ENTER.  
26  
For MP3/WMA/JPEG:  
List screen operations  
While stop...  
You can display the folder list/track list before  
starting play. On this list, you can confirm the  
contents and start playing a disc.  
1 Display the folder list.  
Each time you press the button,  
the list screen comes on and  
goes off.  
Folder/track list  
screens  
2 Select a folder on the list.  
Folder list (MP3/WMA/JPEG)  
Folder : 153/240 Track 154/198  
Page : 4/6  
fol140  
fol141  
fol142  
fol143  
fol144  
fol145  
fol146  
fol147  
fol148  
fol149  
fol150  
fol151  
fol152  
fol153  
fol154  
fol155  
fol156  
fol157  
fol158  
fol159  
fol160  
fol161  
fol162  
fol163  
fol164  
fol165  
fol166  
fol167  
fol168  
fol169  
fol130  
fol131  
fol132  
fol133  
fol134  
fol135  
fol136  
fol137  
fol138  
fol139  
The track list of the selected folder appears.  
To go back to the folder list  
3 Select a track on the list.  
Ex.: Folder list for MP3/WMA  
Track list (MP3/WMA/JPEG/CD Text/audio  
CD)  
Folder : 153/240 Track 154/198  
Page : 4/6  
For JPEG discs: Pressing ENTER will  
pause the selected picture on the monitor.  
file0161.wma  
file0162.mp3  
file0163.wma  
file0164.mp3  
file0165.wma  
file0166.wma  
file0167.wma  
file0168.wma  
file0169.mp3  
file0170.wma  
file0131.mp3 file0141.mp3 file0151.wma  
file0132.mp3 file0142.mp3 file0152.mp3  
file0133.wma file0143.mp3 file0153.wma  
file0134.mp3 file0144.mp3 file0154.mp3  
file0135.mp3 file0145.wma file0155.mp3  
file0136.wma file0146.mp3 file0156.mp3  
file0137.wma file0147.wma file0157.mp3  
file0138.mp3 file0148.mp3 file0158.wma  
file0139.mp3 file0149.wma file0159.wma  
file0140.wma file0150.wma file0160.wma  
For CD Text/audio CD:  
While stop...  
1 Display the track list.  
Each time you press the button,  
the list screen comes on and  
goes off.  
Ex.: Track list for MP3/WMA  
1 Current folder number/total folder number  
(only for MP3/WMA/JPEG)  
2 Select a track on the list.  
2 Current track number/total number of tracks  
in the current folder (for MP3/WMA/JPEG)  
or in the disc (for CD Text/audio CD)  
3 Current page/total number of the pages  
included in the list  
4 Current folder/track (highlighted bar)  
27  
DVD setup menu  
You can store the initial disc playback status.  
While playing, no change can be made on the  
setup menu.  
4
When shipped from the factory, the on-screen  
language is set to English. To change the  
language, see page 29.  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
STREAM/PCM  
DOWN MIX  
STEREO  
DOLBY SURROUND  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
Basic setting procedure  
5 Select an option.  
While stop...  
1
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
LANGUAGE  
STEREO  
DOLBY SURROUND  
MENU LANGUAGE  
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
SUBTITLE  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
6
2
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
DOLBY SURROUND  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
To set other items on the same menu  
Repeat steps 3 to 6.  
Ex.: When selecting the “AUDIO” menu  
To set other items on other menus  
Repeat steps 2 to 6.  
3 Select an item you want to set up.  
To return to the normal screen  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
Ex.: When selecting “DOWN MIX”  
28  
LANGUAGE menu  
Item  
Contents  
Select the initial disc menu language.  
MENU LANGUAGE  
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
SUBTITLE  
Select the initial audio language.  
Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (OFF).  
Select the language for the setup menu and some indications shown on  
the monitor.  
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
For the LANGUAGE settings, see also the language codes list on page 32.  
PICTURE menu  
Item  
Contents  
Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on your  
external monitor.  
16:9 : Select this when the aspect ratio of your monitor is  
16:9.  
MONITOR TYPE  
16:9  
4:3 LETTER BOX  
4:3 LETTER BOX : Select this when the aspect ratio of your  
monitor is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black  
bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.  
4:3 PAN SCAN : Select this when the aspect ratio of your  
monitor is 4:3.  
4:3 PAN SCAN  
While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not  
appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will  
not be shown on the screen.  
Select the on-screen bar position on the monitor.  
1 : Higher position  
2 : Lower position (Help screen under the DVD setup menu  
disappears.)  
OSD POSITION  
Position 1  
Position 2  
If both MP3/WMA files and JPEG files are recorded on a disc,  
you can select which files to play.  
MP3/JPEG  
MP3 : Select this for playing MP3/WMA files.  
JPEG : Select this for playing JPEG files.  
Eject the disc and insert it again to make the new setting  
effective.  
To be continued....  
29  
AUDIO menu  
Item  
Contents  
Select the signal format to be emitted through the DIGITAL OUT  
(Optical) terminal. For details, see page 36.  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
PCM ONLY : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a  
decoder incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio, or  
connecting to a recording device.  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM : Select this when connecting an  
amplifier or a decoder compatible with Dolby Digital.  
STREAM/PCM : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a  
decoder compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio.  
When playing back a multi-channel DVD disc, this setting affects  
the signals reproduced through the analog terminalsAV-OUT and  
cordless headphones (and through the DIGITAL OUT terminal when  
PCM ONLYis selected for DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT).  
DOLBY SURROUND : Select this when you want to enjoy multi-  
channel surround audio by connecting an amplifier compatible with  
Dolby Surround to this monitor.  
DOWN MIX  
STEREO : Normally select this.  
You can enjoy a powerful sound at low or middle volume levels while  
playing a Dolby Digital software.  
D. (Dynamic) RANGE  
COMPRESSION  
AUTO : Select this to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded  
software (excluding 1-channel and 2-channel software).  
ON : Select this to always use this function.  
30  
Maintenance  
To prevent damage to the exterior  
How to handle discs  
Center holder  
Do not apply pesticides, benzine, thinner or  
other volatile substances to the monitor.  
The cabinet surface primarily consists of  
plastic materials.  
When removing a disc from  
its case, press down the center  
holder of the case and lift the  
disc out, holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
Do not wipe with benzine, thinner or similar  
substances because this will results in  
discoloration or removal of the paint.  
When a cloth with a cleansing chemical is  
used, follow the caution points.  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
Do not leave the unit in contact with rubber  
or vinyl products for long periods of time.  
Do not use cleansers which have polishing  
granules because this could damage the  
cabinet.  
Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
To keep discs clean  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe  
it with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
Do not use any solvent (for  
example, conventional record cleaner, spray,  
thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
Clean off dirt by wiping lightly with  
a soft cloth  
When the cabinet is very dirty, wipe with a  
well-wrung cloth dipped in a kitchen cleanser  
(neutral) thinned by water and then go over the  
same surface with a dry cloth.  
(Since there is the possibility of water drops  
getting inside of the unit, do not directly apply  
cleanser to the surface.)  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
To remove these rough spots, rub  
the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
DVD player in the following cases:  
After starting the heater in the car.  
If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the DVD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the  
moisture evaporates.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Warped  
disc  
Sticker  
Sticker  
residue  
Stick-on  
label  
Disc  
31  
Language codes  
Code  
Language  
Code  
Language  
Code  
Language  
AA  
AB  
AF  
AM  
AR  
AS  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BE  
BG  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DZ  
EL  
EO  
ET  
EU  
FA  
FI  
Afar  
IK  
IN  
IS  
IW  
JI  
Inupiak  
RN  
RO  
RW  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SH  
SI  
Kirundi  
Rumanian  
Kinyarwanda  
Sanskrit  
Sindhi  
Sangho  
Serbo-Croatian  
Singhalese  
Slovak  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Ameharic  
Arabic  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Byelorussian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Bengali, Bangla  
Tibetan  
Breton  
Catalan  
Corsican  
Czech  
Welsh  
Bhutani  
Greek  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Basque  
Persian  
Finnish  
Fiji  
Faroese  
Frisian  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Hebrew  
Yiddish  
JW  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
LT  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Greenlandic  
Cambodian  
Kannada  
Korean (KOR)  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
SK  
SL  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Siswati  
Sesotho  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Tamil  
Telugu  
Tajik  
Thai  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Setswana  
Tonga  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
Kirghiz  
Latin  
Lingala  
ST  
Laothian  
Lithuanian  
Latvian, Lettish  
Malagasy  
Maori  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Mongolian  
Moldavian  
Marathi  
Malay (MAY)  
Maltese  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
SU  
SW  
TA  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
TK  
TL  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
TW  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
VO  
WO  
XH  
YO  
ZU  
LV  
MG  
MI  
MK  
ML  
MN  
MO  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
NO  
OC  
OM  
OR  
PA  
PL  
FJ  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
Irish  
Scots Gaelic  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Twi  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
(Afan) Oromo  
Oriya  
Panjabi  
Uzbek  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Wolof  
Xhosa  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
Hindi  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Polish  
PS  
PT  
QU  
RM  
Pashto, Pushto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-Romance  
IE  
32  
More about this monitor  
Basic operations  
Turning off the power  
If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start automatically, next  
time you turn on the power.  
DVD/VCD/JPEG special functions  
For some DVDs and VCDs, changing the  
subtitle language, audio language (or audio  
channel) without using the disc menu is  
prohibited.  
While zoomed in, the picture may look  
coarse.  
Disc operations  
General  
Playing a DVD-R/DVD-RW or CD-R/CD-  
RW  
In this manual, words trackand fileare  
interchangeably used when referring to MP3/  
WMA/JPEG files and their file names.  
This unit can also playback 8 cm discs.  
This unit can only playback audio CD (CD-  
DA) files if different type of files are recorded  
in the same disc.  
Use only finalizeddiscs.  
This unit can play back only the files of the  
same type which is first detected if a disc  
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and  
MP3/WMA/JPEG files.  
This unit can play back either MP3/WMA  
files or JPEG files if a disc includes both kind  
of files. Set the playback file type on DVD  
setup menu (page 29) before playing back a  
disc containing both kind of files.  
Only for CD-R/CD-RW: This unit can play  
back multi-session discs; however, unclosed  
sessions will be skipped while playing.  
Some DVD-R/DVD-RW or CD-R/CD-  
RW may not play back on this unit because  
of their disc characteristics, and for the  
following causes:  
The first track will be skipped if a different  
type of file is detected first.  
When a disc has been loaded, selecting  
DISCfor the playback source starts disc  
play.  
Starting playback  
When a disc is inserted upside down, NO  
DISCappears on the screen, then the disc  
will automatically eject.  
You can play a disc even if the monitor is  
closed.  
Discs are dirty or scratched.  
Moisture condensation occurs on the lens  
inside the unit.  
Basic operations  
No sound comes out during slow motion  
playback. When playing a VCD, reverse slow  
motion playback is prohibited.  
One Touch Replay works only within the  
same title. (For some DVDs, this function  
does not work.)  
When playing a DVD/VCD, no sound comes  
out during Search.  
The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are  
written with Packet Writemethod.  
DVD-R/DVD-RW which are not written  
in UDF-Bridge Format (eg. UDF format or  
ISO format).  
There are improper recording conditions  
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions  
(stain, scratch, warp, etc.).  
DVD-RW/CD-RW may require a longer  
readout time since the reflectance of DVD-  
RW/CD-RW is lower than that of regular  
discs.  
Reverse search stops automatically when it  
reaches the beginning of the disc. Playback  
resumes at normal speed.  
To be continued....  
33  
Do not use the following DVD-R/DVD-RW  
or CD-R/CD-RW:  
This unit can play back the files recorded in  
VBR (variable bit rate).  
Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal  
stuck to the surface.  
Discs on which labels can be directly  
printed by an ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidities may cause malfunctions or  
damages to discs.  
The files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy  
in elapsed time display, and do not show  
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after  
performing the search function, this  
difference becomes noticeable.  
This unit cannot play back the following files:  
MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO  
format.  
MP3 files encoded in an unappropriated  
format.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>  
(regardless of the letter caseupper/lower)  
recorded in either CD-R/CD-RW or in  
DVD-R/DVD-RW.  
This unit can show the names of albums,  
artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,  
1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and WMA  
files.  
This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
WMA files which are not based upon  
Windows Media® Audio.  
WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
WMA files recorded with MBR (Multiple  
Bit Rate) format.  
Files which have the data such as WAVE,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
Playing a JPEG disc  
This unit can play back JPEG files with the  
extension code <.jpg> (regardless of the letter  
caseupper/lower) recorded in either CD-R/  
CD-RW or in DVD-R/DVD-RW.  
Bit rate: MP3: 32 kbps 320 kbps  
WMA: 32 kbps 192 kbps  
Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for WMA)  
Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
The maximum number of characters for file/  
folder names vary among the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
It is recommended that you record a file  
at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file has been  
recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x  
480, it will take a long time to be shown.)  
This System can play only baseline JPEG  
files. Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG  
files cannot be played.  
Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital  
cameras, web, etc.  
ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
Romeo: up to 128 characters  
Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.  
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely  
used now.  
Joliet: up to 64 characters  
Windows long file name: up to 128  
characters  
This unit can recognize the total of  
1100 files, 250 folders (maximum of 999 files  
per folder).  
If progressive or lossless JPEG files are  
played back, a black screen appears. In this  
case, stop playback and select a baseline  
JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to  
select another file.  
34  
Even if you try to pause the current picture,  
it may be skipped, then the next picture will  
pause.  
This unit can recognize the total of 1100  
files, 250 folders (maximum of 999 files per  
folder).  
On-screen guide icons  
During play, the following guide icons may  
appear for a while on the monitor.  
: Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-audio languages (for  
DVD only).  
Changing the source  
If you change the source, playback also stops  
(without ejecting the disc).  
Next time you select DISCfor the playback  
source, disc play starts automatically.  
:
Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-subtitle languages  
(for DVD only).  
: Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-angle views (for  
DVD only).  
Ejecting a disc  
: Play  
If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to prevent it from  
dust. (Disc will not play this time.)  
: Pause  
: Forward slow motion playback  
(for DVD and VCD only)  
: Reverse slow motion playback  
(for DVD only)  
DVD setup menu  
When the language you have selected is not  
recorded on a disc, the original language is  
automatically used as the initial language. In  
addition, for some discs, the initial languages  
settings will not work as you set due to their  
internal disc programming.  
: Forward search  
: Reverse search  
While playing (or pausing), you cannot  
change these languages.  
After you change any of these language  
settings, eject the disc and insert it (or another  
disc) again so that your setting takes effect.  
When you select 16:9for a picture whose  
aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes  
due to the process for converting the picture  
width.  
Even if 4:3 PAN SCANis selected, the  
screen size may become  
4:3 LETTER BOXwith some DVDs. This  
depends on how they are recorded.  
35  
About sounds reproduced through the terminals  
Through the analog terminals (AV-OUT/cordless headphones): 2-channel signal is emitted.  
When playing a multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.  
(AUDIODOWN MIX: see page 30.)  
Through DIGITAL OUT (optical):  
Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted through this  
terminal. (For more details, see table below.)  
To reproduce multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect  
an amplifier or a decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTcorrectly. (See page 30.)  
Output signals through the DIGITAL OUT terminal  
Output signals are different depending on the DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTsetting on the setup  
menu (see page 30).  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
Output Signals  
Playback Disc  
STREAM/PCM  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM  
PCM ONLY  
DVD  
48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM  
96 kHz, Linear PCM  
with DTS  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
DTS bitstream  
Dolby Digital bitstream  
MPEG bitstream  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
DTS bitstream 44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits  
with Dolby Digital  
stereo Linear PCM  
with MPEG Audio  
48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
Audio CD, Video CD  
Audio CD with DTS  
MP3/WMA  
36  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Colored spots (red, blue  
and green) appear on the  
screen.  
This is a characteristic of  
liquid crystal panels and is  
not a malfunction.  
See Noteon page 6.  
No picture appears and  
sound is not heard.  
The cord is not connected  
correctly to the external  
component.  
Connect the cord correctly.  
Correct input mode is not  
selected.  
Select the correct input  
mode.  
The unit does not work at  
all.  
The built-in microcomputer Reset the unit (see page 4).  
may have functioned  
incorrectly due to noise, etc.  
Remote controller does not The battery has lost its  
Install a new battery.  
work.  
charge.  
Cordless headphones do  
not work.  
The sensor is exposed to  
strong light.  
Do not expose the sensor to  
strong light.  
Howling occurs from  
the speakers or the  
headphones.  
It may be caused by a  
camcorder connected to the  
monitor.  
Camcorder is now in  
recording mode. Deactivate  
the recording mode.  
• “NO DISCappears on the Disc is inserted upside  
screen. down.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
CD-R/CD-RW or DVD-R/ CD-R/CD-RW or DVD-R/  
DVD-RW cannot be played DVD-RW is not finalized.  
back.  
Insert a finalized CD-  
R/CD-RW or DVD-R/  
DVD-RW.  
Tracks on the CD-R/  
CD-RW or DVD-R/  
DVD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
Finalize the CD-R/CD-  
RW or DVD-R/DVD-RW  
with the component which  
you used for recording.  
The left and right edges of 4:3 PAN SCANis  
Select 4:3 LETTER BOX.”  
the picture are missing on selected when viewing on  
(See page 29.)  
the screen.  
a conventional TV (aspect  
ratio 4:3).  
37  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Sound and picture are  
sometimes interrupted or  
distorted.  
You are driving on rough  
roads.  
Stop playback while driving  
on rough roads.  
Disc is scratched.  
Change the disc.  
Connections are incorrect.  
Check the cords and  
connections.  
The playback pictures  
cannot be shown correctly. PAL) is not correct.  
The color system (NTSC/  
Set it correctly (see page  
14).  
Disc cannot be played  
back.  
No MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks Change the disc.  
are recorded on the disc.  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks do Add the extension code  
not have the extension code <.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.jpg>  
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.jpg> to their file names.  
in their file names.  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks are Change the disc.  
not recorded in a compliant  
format.  
Record MP3/WMA/JPEG  
tracks using a compliant  
application (see page 17).  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks  
are recorded in DVD+R/  
DVD+RW media.  
Change the disc.  
Record MP3/WMA/JPEG  
tracks using DVD-R/DVD-  
RW media.  
Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not Skip to another track or  
an MP3/WMA file (although change the disc. (Do not add  
it has the extension code  
<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
the extension code <.mp3>  
or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
A longer readout time is  
Readout time varies due to  
Do not use too many  
required.  
the complexity of the folder/ hierarchies and folders.  
file configuration.  
Tracks cannot be played  
Playback order is determined  
back as you have intended when the files are recorded.  
them to play.  
Elapsed playing time is not This sometimes occurs  
correct.  
during play. This is caused  
by how the tracks are  
recorded on the disc.  
38  
Specifications  
WIDESCREEN MONITOR  
GENERAL  
Screen:  
Power requirement:  
Operating voltage:  
9 inch liquid crystal panel  
Number of pixel:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
336 960 pixels  
(480 vertical × 234 horizontal × 3)  
Drive method:  
Grounding system: Negative ground  
Allowable operating temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix  
format  
Allowable storage temperature:  
20°C to +80°C  
Cordless audio:  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation size (approx.):  
215 mm × 49 mm × 374 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
Infrared audio transmitter  
L-channel: 2.3 MHz  
R-channel: 2.8 MHz  
Effective listening angle: 30˚  
Effective range: 2 m  
Color system: NTSC/PAL  
Input:  
2.9 kg (excluding accessories)  
CORDLESS HEADPHONES  
Type: Open-air type  
Driver unit:  
30 mm Mylarcone dynamic speaker  
Impedance: 16  
Video: RCA pin × 2 circuits  
1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Audio: RCA pin × 2 circuits  
1.5 V(rms)  
Frequency response: 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Infrared wavelength: 850 nm 50 nm  
Power requirements:  
DC 3 V (2.4 V to 3.3 V allowance)  
(R03/AAA battery × 2)  
Mass (approx.):  
Output:  
Video: RCA pin × 1 circuit  
1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Audio: RCA pin × 1 circuit  
1.5 V(rms)  
DIGITAL OUT: Optical  
170 g (except batteries)  
Allowable operating temperature:  
30°C to +65°C  
DVD/CD PLAYER SECTION  
Signal detection system: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
Number of channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency response:  
DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:16 Hz to 22 000 Hz  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either  
registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
VCD, CD:  
Dynamic range:  
16 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Signal-to-noise ratio: 95 dB  
Wow and flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3):  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio):  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
39  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?  
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück  
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts  
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?  
Réinitialisez votre appareil  
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil  
Hebt u PROBLEMEN met de bediening?  
Stel het apparaat terug  
Zie de pagina met de paragraaf Het apparaat terugstellen  
EN, GE, FR, NL  
0305MNMMDWJEIN  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
KV-MRD900/KV-MR9010  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
Handleiding voor installatie/aansluiting  
0305MNMMDWJEIN  
EN, GE, FR, NL  
LVT1341-005A  
[E]  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
FRANÇAIS  
NEDERLANDS  
Die Abbildungen des Breitbildmonitors in dieser  
Anleitung zeigen den KV-MRD900, wenn nicht anders  
angegeben.  
Les illustrations du moniteur à écran large utilisées dans De afbeeldingen van de breedbeeld-monitor in deze  
ce manuel sont du KV-MRD900, sauf spécification handleiding zijn gebaseerd op de KV-MRD900, tenzij anders  
The illustrations of the widescreen monitor used in this  
manual is of KV-MRD900, unless specified otherwise.  
contraire.  
aangegeven.  
WARNING  
WARNUNGEN  
AVERTISSEMENT  
L’installation nécessite certaines connaissances  
spéciales.  
N’installez pas le moniteur vous-même. Consultez  
un revendeur possédant les connaissances  
spécialesnécessairespouruneinstallationcorrecte  
et sûre.  
WAARSCHUWING  
Installation requires some special knowledge.  
Do not install the monitor yourself. Consult a  
dealer having special knowledge of this kind  
for safe and reliable installation.  
Die Installation erfordert entsprechende  
Fachkenntnisse.  
Het installeren vereist een specifieke kennis.  
Installeer het monitorsysteem derhalve niet  
zelf. Raadpleeg de plaats van aankoop of een  
vakman die deze speciale kennis heeft voor  
het veilig en betrouwbaar installeren.  
Installieren Sie das Monitorsystem nicht selbst.  
Wenden Sie sich für eine sichere und fachgerechte  
Installation an einen Vertragshändler.  
• DO NOT INSTALL THE MONITOR IN A LOCATION  
WHICH OBSTRUCTS DRIVING, VISIBILITY,  
SAFETY DEVICE FUNCTION SUCH AS AIR  
BAGS OR WHICH IS PROHIBITED BY  
APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS.  
If the monitor is installed in a location which  
obstructs forward visibility or operation of the air  
bag or other safety equipment or which interferes  
with operation of the vehicle, it may cause an  
accident.  
• NEVER USE BOLTS OR NUTS FROM THE  
VEHICLE’S SAFETY DEVICES FOR  
INSTALLATION.  
If bolts or nuts from the steering wheel, brakes or  
other safety devices are used for installation of the  
monitor, it may cause an accident.  
• ATTACH THE WIRES CORRECTLY.  
If the wiring is not correctly performed, it may cause  
a fire or an accident. In particular, be sure to run  
and secure the lead wire so that it does not get  
tangled with a screw or the moving portion of a seat  
rail.  
• USE WITH DC 12 V NEGATIVE GROUND  
VEHICLES.  
This monitor is only for use in a DC 12 V negative  
ground vehicle.  
It cannot be used in large trucks or diesel vehicles  
which are DC 24 V vehicles.  
• INSTALLEER DE MONITOR NIET OP EEN  
PLAATS DIE HET BESTUREN VAN DE AUTO,  
HET ZICHT, DE WERKING VAN  
VEILIGHEIDSVOORZIENINGEN ALS AIRBAGS  
HINDERT OF OP PLAATSEN DIE DOOR  
WETTELIJKE BEPALINGEN OF REGELS ZIJN  
VERBODEN.  
Als de monitor op een plaats is geïnstalleerd waar dit het  
uitzicht op de weg belemmert, dit de werking van de  
airbag of dit andere veiligheidsvoorzieningen hindert, of  
waar het besturen van het voertuig in gevaar wordt  
gebracht, kan dit tot een ongeval lijden.  
• GEBRUIK NOOIT SCHROEVEN OF MOEREN  
VOOR DE INSTALLATIE DIE NODIG ZIJN VOOR  
DE VEILIGHEIDSVOORZIENINGEN VAN DE  
AUTO.  
Als schroeven of moeren van het stuur, de rem of andere  
veiligheidsvoorzieningen worden gebruikt voor de  
installatie van de monitor, kan dit tot een ongeval lijden.  
• SLUIT DE BEDRADING OP DE JUISTE WIJZE  
AAN.  
Als de bedrading verkeerd wordt aangesloten, kan dit tot  
brand of een ongeval lijden. Let er met name op dat de  
stroomvoorzieningskabel nergens achter blijft steken of  
in contact komt met de bewegende delen van de rails van  
de stoelen.  
DEN MONITOR NICHT AN EINEM ORT  
ANBRINGEN, WO ER BEIM FAHREN STÖRT  
ODER DIE SICHT BESCHRÄNKT, DIE FUNKTION  
VON SICHERHEITSEINRICHTUNGEN WIE  
AIRBAGS BEHINDERT ODER WO ÖRTLICH  
GELTENDE GESETZE ODER VORSCHRIFTEN  
DEN EINBAU VERBIETEN.  
Wenn Sie den Monitor an einem Ort installieren, an dem  
die Voraussicht oder der Betrieb des Airbags oder  
anderer Sicherheitseinrichtungen des Fahrzeugs  
beeinträchtigt wird oder das Führen des Fahrzeugs  
gestört wird, kann er die Ursache für einen Unfall sein.  
VERWENDEN SIE NIEMALS SCHRAUBEN ODER  
MUTTERN DER SICHERHEITSEIN-RICHTUNGEN  
DES FAHRZEUGS ZUR INSTALLATION.  
Wenn Schrauben oder Muttern des Lenkrads, der  
Bremsen oder anderer Sicherheitsein-richtungen  
zur Installation des Monitors verwendet werden,  
kann ein Unfall verursacht werden.  
BRINGEN SIE DIE DRÄHTE ORDNUNGSGEMÄSS AN.  
Wenn die Verkabelung nicht richtig durchgeführt  
wird, entsteht hierdurch möglicherweise ein Feuer  
oder Unfall. Achten Sie insbesondere darauf, das  
Kabel so zu verlegen und zu sichern, daß es sich  
nicht mit einer Schraube oder dem beweglichen Teil  
einer Sitzschiene verheddert.  
VERWENDEN SIE DAS GERÄT NUR IN  
FAHRZEUGEN MIT 12-V-GLEICHSTROM-  
SYSTEM UND NEGATIVER ERDUNG.  
Dieser Monitor darf nur in Fahrzeugen mit einem  
12-V-Gleichstromsystem und Negativer Erdung  
verwendet werden.  
Er darf nicht in großen Lkw oder Diesel-fahrzeugen  
mit 24-V-Gleichstrom-systemen verwendet werden.  
Wenn der Monitor im falschen Fahrzeugtyp  
verwendet wird, kann er ein Feuer oder einen  
Unfall verursachen.  
Um einen Kurzschluß zu vermeiden, empfiehlt es  
sich, den negativen Pol der Batterie abzutrennen und  
alle elektrischen Anschlüsse vorzunehmen, bevor der  
Monitor installiert wird. Wenn Sie sich nicht sicher  
sind, wie das Gerät installiert wird, lassen Sie es von  
einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.  
Den Einbau des Monitors an den folgenden  
Stellen vermeiden  
– an denen die Fahrsicherheit gefährdet wäre.  
– an denen es direkter Sonneneinstrahlung oder  
Hitzeeinwirkung durch die Heizung ausgesetzt  
wäre. Installieren Sie es auch nicht an einem  
extrem heißen Ort.  
N
INSTALLEZ PAS LE MONITEUR DANS UN  
ENDROIT OÙ IL PEUT GÊNER LA VISIBILITÉ DU  
CONDUCTEUR OU LE FONCTIONNEMENT D UN  
DISPOSITIF DE SÉCURITÉ TEL QUE LES COUSSINS  
GONFLABLES, OU DANS UN ENDROIT INTERDIT  
PAR LES LOIS ET RÈGLEMENTS EN PLACE.  
Si le moniteur était installé à un emplacement gênant  
la visibilité avant, ou le déploiement du sac à air, et  
autres dispositifs de sécurité, ou à un emplacement  
gênant pour la conduite du véhicule, comme près du  
levier des vitesses ou de la pédale du frein, cela  
risquerait de provoquer des accidents.  
• NE JAMAIS UTILISER POUR L’INSTALLATION  
DES BOULONS OU DES ÉCROUS PROVENANT  
DES DISPOSITIFS DE SÉCURITÉ DU VÉHICULE.  
Si l’on utilisait pour l’utilisation du moniteur des  
boulons et des écrous cannibalisés du volant, des  
freins ou autres dispositifs de sécurités, cela  
risquerait de provoquer des accidents.  
• ATTACHER LES CORDONS CORRECTEMENT.  
Si le câblage n’est pas exécuté correctement, cela  
risque de provoquer un incendie ou autre accident.  
Veiller, en particulier, à tirer et attacher les fils en sorte  
qu’ils me s’accrochent pas à une vis ou ne se coincent  
dans les parties mobiles des rails des sièges.  
• USAGE SUR LES VÉHICULES DE 12 V CC AVEC  
NÉGATIF À LA MASSE.  
Ce moniteur ne peut être utilisé que sur les véhicules  
de 12 V CC avec négatif à la masse.  
Il ne peut pas être utilisé sur les gros camions ou  
les véhicules diesel de 24 V CC.  
S’il était utilisé sur un type de véhicule inadéquat  
cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou autres  
accidents.  
• Pour éviter les courts-circuits, nous recommandons  
que vous déconnectiez la borne négative de la batterie  
et réalisiez toutes les connexions électriques avant  
d’installer l’appareil. Si vous n’êtes pas sûr de savoir  
comment installer cet appareil correctement, faites-le  
installer par un technicien qualifié.  
• ALLEEN GEBRUIKEN IN COMBINATIE MET  
VOERTUIGEN DIE WERKEN MET EEN  
NEGATIEVE AARDING VAN 12 V  
If it is used in the wrong type of vehicle, it may  
cause a fire or accident.  
GELIJKSTROOM.  
• To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you  
disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make  
all electrical connections before installing the unit. If  
you are not sure how to install this unit correctly,  
have it installed by a qualified technician.  
• Avoid installing the monitor in the following  
places  
– Where it would hinder your safe driving.  
– Where it would be exposed to direct sunlight or  
heat directly from the heater or placed in an  
extremely hot place.  
– Where it would be subject to rain, water splashes  
or excessive humidity.  
– Where it would be subject to dust.  
– Where it would be positioned on an unstable  
place.  
Dit monitorsysteem is alleen bedoeld voor voertuigen die  
zijn gebaseerd op een negatieve aarding van 12 V  
gelijkstroom. Het systeem kan niet worden gebruikt in  
vrachtwagens of diesels, die met 24V gelijkstroom werken.  
Wanneer dit systeem in een verkeerd type voertuig wordt  
gebruikt, kan dit tot brand of een ongeval lijden.  
• Ter voorkoming van kortsluiting, raden we aan dat  
u de negatieve aansluiting van de accu losmaakt en  
daarna alle benodigde verbindingen tot stand brengt  
alvorens de eenheid te installeren. Als u niet zeker weet  
hoe u de eenheid moet installeren, kunt u dit beter door  
een erkend vakman laten doen.  
• Installeer de monitor niet op de volgende  
plaatsen  
– waar deze een gevaar vormt voor het besturen van de  
auto.  
– waar deze wordt blootgesteld aan direct zonlicht, een  
verwarming of een andere hittebron.  
– waar deze wordt blootgesteld aan regen, spatwater of  
extreme vochtigheid.  
– waar deze wordt blootgesteld aan stof.  
– waar deze op een instabiele ondergrond komt te staan.  
– waar deze de auto kan beschadigen.  
– waar het toestel niet goed kan worden geventileerd.  
• Évitez d’installer le moniteur dans les endroits  
suivants  
– Où il peut gêner la conduite de la voiture.  
– Où il est exposé à la lumière directe du soleil, à la  
chaleur directe du chauffage ou placé dans un  
endroit très chaud.  
– Où il est sujet à la pluie, aux éclaboussures ou à  
une humidité excessive.  
– Where it could damage the car’s fittings.  
– Where proper ventilation would not be  
maintained.  
– an denen es Regen, Wasserspritzern oder  
übermäßiger Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt wäre.  
– an denen es Staub ausgesetzt wäre.  
– die instabil sind.  
– an denen die Fahrzeugarmaturen beschädigt  
werden könnten.  
CAUTION  
– Où il est sujet à la poussière.  
Since there may be legal regulations defining the  
permissible installation locations for the monitor  
which differ by country or by state, be sure to  
install the color monitor in a location complying  
with any such laws.  
– Où il est positionné dans un endroit instable.  
– Où il peut endommager les accessoires de la  
voiture.  
– Où une ventilation correcte ne peut pas être  
maintenue.  
– wo richtige Lüftung nicht gewährleistet werden  
kann  
LET OP!  
VORSICHT  
Er zijn mogelijk bepaalde regels of bepalingen die de  
installatieplaats voor de monitor bepalen, en deze  
regels of bepalingen kunnen per land of gebied  
verschillend. Plaats de kleurenmonitor beslist in  
overeenstemming met dergelijke bepalingen.  
Da örtlich geltende gesetzliche Vorschriften die  
zulässigen Stellen zur Anbringung des  
Farbmonitors festlegen können, müssen Sie sich  
zuerst über alle zutreffenden Vorschriften  
informieren und diese befolgen.  
ATTENTION  
Puisqu’il peut y avoir des réglementations définissant  
les emplacements d’installation autorisés pour un  
moniteur et que celles-ci peuvent varier d’un pays ou  
d’une région à l’autre, assurez-vous d’installer le  
moniteur couleur dans un endroit conforme à ces lois.  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et  
raccordement  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil.  
Après vérification, veuillez les placer correctement.  
Parts list for installation and connection Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß  
Lijst van onderdelen die u bij installatie  
en aansluiting nodig hebt  
De volgende onderdelen worden bij het apparaat geleverd.  
Installeer ze op de juiste wijze, nadat u ze hebt gecontroleerd.  
Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem  
Gerät geliefert.  
The following parts are provided with this unit.  
After checking them, please set them correctly.  
Nach ihrer Überprüfung, die Teile richtig einsetzen.  
Cordless headphones (supplied only with KV-MRD900)  
Schnurloser Kopfhörer (nur mit KV-MRD900 mitgeliefert)  
Casque d’écoute sans fil (fourni uniquement avec le KV-MRD900)  
Draadloze hoofdtelefoon (alleen bijgeleverd bij de KV-MRD900)  
Joint cord  
Verbindungskabel  
Cordon de raccordement  
Verlengsnoer  
Remote controller  
Fernbedienung  
Télécommande  
Afstandsbediening  
KS-HP2  
Batteries  
Batterien  
Piles  
Batterijen  
Widescreen monitor  
Breitbildmonitor  
Battery  
Batterie  
Pile  
Moniteur à écran large  
Breedbeeld-monitor  
Batterij  
Power cord  
R03/AAA  
Spannunsgversorgungskabel  
Cordon d’alimentation  
Electriciteitskabel  
Paper template  
Papierschablone  
Gabarit en papier  
Papieren malletje  
Base plate  
Basisplatte  
Plaque de base  
Basisplaat  
CR2025  
RM-RK230  
Nuts (M5): x 12  
Muttern (M5): x 12  
Écrous (M5): x 12  
Moeren (M5): x 12  
Spacers: silver–9 mm: x 2  
Distanzstücke: Silber–9 mm: x 2  
Intercalaire argent–9 mm: x 2  
Tussenringen: zilver–9 mm: x 2  
Screws–M5 x 10 mm: x 12  
Schrauben–M5 x 10 mm: x 12  
Vis–M5 x 10 mm: x 12  
Schroef–M5 x 10 mm: x 12  
Spacers: black–7 mm: x 4  
Screws–M5 x 14 mm: x 6  
Schrauben–M5 x 14 mm: x 6  
Vis–M5 x 14 mm: x 6  
Distanzstücke: Schwarz–7 mm: x 4  
Intercalaire noire–7 mm: x 4  
Tussenringen: zwart–7 mm: x 4  
Schroef–M5 x 14 mm: x 6  
Shroud  
Abschirmung  
Socle de montage au plafond  
Versteviging  
Screws–M5 x 23 mm: x 6  
Schrauben–M5 x 23 mm: x 6  
Vis–M5 x 23 mm: x 6  
Slide plates  
Dia-Platten  
Plaques latérales  
Zijplaten  
Flat washer–ø 5 mm: x 12  
Scheibe–ø 5 mm: x 12  
Rondelle plate–ø 5 mm: x 12  
Platte tussenringen–ø 5 mm: x 12  
Schroef–M5 x 23 mm: x 6  
– 1 –  
INSTALLATION  
EINBAU  
INSTALLATIE  
INSTALLATION  
• The following illustration shows a typical installation. Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau.  
• Op de volgende afbeelding kunt u zien hoe de installatie,  
normaal gesproken, in zijn werk gaat. U moet echter bij  
de installatie rekening houden met de bijzonderheden  
van uw eigen auto. Neem bij vragen of voor meer  
bijzonderheden over inbouwpakketten contact op met uw  
JVC auto audiohandelaar of een dealer of een bedrijf dat  
inbouwpakketten levert.  
Lillustration suivante est un exemple d’installation  
typique. Cependant, vous devez faire les  
However, you should make adjustments  
corresponding to your specific car. If you have any  
questions or require information regarding  
installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying  
kits.  
Dennoch müssen Sie entsprechend Ihrem jeweiligen  
Auto Anpassungen vornehmen. Bei irgendwelchen  
Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich des  
Einbausatzes brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren  
JVC-Autoradiofachhändler oder ein Unternehmen  
das diese Einbausätze vertreibt.  
ajustements correspondant à votre voiture  
particulière. Si vous avez des questions ou avez  
besoin d’information sur des kits d’installation,  
consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une  
compagnie d’approvisionnement.  
Detaching the dome light cover / Abnehmen der Deckenleuchtenblende / Détachement du couvercle du plafonnier / Bevestigen van de afdekking  
van de koepelverlichting  
To mount the widescreen monitor, detach the dome light covers.  
As illustrated, depress the two portions on the cover indicated  
by the marks 5 (1), then pull off the cover (2).  
1
Zum Anbringen des Breitbildmonitors die Deckenleuchtenblenden abnehmen.  
Wie in der Abbildung gezeigt drücken Sie die beiden Abdeckungsstellen ein,  
die durch die Markierungen 5 (1) gekennzeichnet sind und ziehen dann die  
Abdeckung (2) ab.  
1
Pour monter le moniteur à écran large, détachez les couvercles du plafonnier.  
Comme montré sur l’illustration, faites pression sur les deux parties sur le  
couvercle marquées par 5 (1), puis retirez le couvercle (2).  
Voor het installeren van de breedbeeld-monitor, moet u de afdekkingen van de  
koepelverlichting verwijderen.  
Druk zoals afgebeeld op de twee gedeeltes op de afdekking die met 5 zijn  
gemarkeerd (1) en verwijder vervolgens de afdekking (2).  
2
Installeren van de breedbeeld-monitor  
De installatiewijze verschilt afhankelijk van het type auto.  
Hier wordt slechts een voorbeeld gegeven. Zie de  
rechterbladzijden voor details.  
Laat bij voorkeur het monitorsysteem door een  
erkend technicus installeren.  
Montage du moniteur à écran large  
Anbringen des Breitbildmonitors  
Mounting the widescreen monitor  
Installation procedure varies among cars. The  
following is an example. For detailed procedure, see  
the right page.  
It is recommended to have the monitor system  
installed by a qualified technician.  
La procédure d’installation varie d’une voiture à  
l’autre. La procédure qui suit est un exemple. Pour en  
savoir plus, référez-vous à la page de droite.  
Il est recommandé de faire installer le système de  
moniteur par un technicien qualifié.  
Das Installationsverfahren hängt von dem jeweiligen  
Fahrzeugtyp ab. Das folgende ist ein Beispiel.  
Einzelheiten zum Verfahren siehe betreffende Seiten.  
Es wird empfohlen, daß das Monitorsystem durch  
einen qualifizierten Techniker installiert wird.  
Widescreen monitor  
Breitbildmonitor  
Moniteur à écran large  
Breedbeeld-monitor  
1
*
*1 Nuts (M5): x 12  
Muttern (M5): x 12  
Écrous (M5): x 12  
Moeren (M5): x 12  
Ceiling panel  
Deckenplatte  
Panneau de plafond  
Plafondpaneel  
Ceiling reinforcement crosspieces  
Deckenverstärkungsstreben  
Traverses de renforcement du plafond  
Kruisbalken plafondversteviging  
TV tuner, etc.  
TV-Tuner usw.  
Tuner de télévision, etc.  
TV-tuner, etc.  
Car receiver, etc.  
Autoreceiver usw.  
Récepteur d’autoradio, etc.  
Autoradio-ontvanger, enz.  
Slide plates  
Dia-Platten  
Plaques latérales  
Zijplaten  
1
*
2
*
*2 Screws–M5 x 10 mm: x 12  
Schrauben–M5 x 10 mm: x 12  
Vis–M5 x 10 mm: x 12  
Schroef–M5 x 10 mm: x 12  
Before mounting the monitor, make sure that the screws do not reach  
the ceiling panel.  
Base plate  
Basisplatte  
Plaque de base  
Basisplaat  
Vor der Anbringung des Monitors sicherstellen, dass die Schrauben  
nicht die Deckenplatte erreichen.  
2
*
Avant de monter le moniteur, assurez-vous que les vis n’atteignent  
pas le panneau du plafond.  
When NOT using the shroud/Wenn das Schirmblech NICHT verwendet  
wird/Lors que le socle de montage au plafond N’est PAS utilisé/Indien  
de verstijving NIET wordt gebruikt  
2
*
Controleer alvorens de monitor te bevestigen dat de schroeven niet het  
plafondpaneel raken.  
*3 Flat washer–ø 5 mm: x 6  
Scheibe–ø 5 mm: x 6  
Rondelle plate–ø 5 mm: x 6  
Versteviging–ø 5 mm: x 6  
These should not be used if the monitor position after installed seems  
so low that it may interfere with visibility through the rearview mirror.  
When using the shroud/Wenn das Schirmblech verwendet wird/Lors de  
l’utilisation du socle de montage au plafond/Indien de verstijving wordt  
gebruikt  
3
4
*
5
*
Diese sollen nicht verwendet werden, wenn die Monitorposition nach  
dem Einbau so niedrig ist, dass sie die freie Sicht durch den  
Rückspiegel behindern können.  
*
*4 Spacers: black–7 mm: x 4  
Distanzstücke: Schwarz–7 mm: x 4  
Intercalaire noire–7 mm: x 4  
Tussenringen: zwart–7 mm: x 4  
*5 Spacers: silver–9 mm: x 2  
Distanzstücke: Silber–9 mm: x 2  
Intercalaire argent–9 mm: x 2  
Tussenringen: zilver–9 mm: x 2  
Cette partie ne doit pas être utilisée si la position du moniteur après  
l’installation paraît si basse qu’elle pourrait gêner la visibilité du  
conducteur dans le rétroviseur.  
Gebruik niet indien de positie van de monitor na het installeren dermate laag  
is dat de monitor het zicht via de achteruitkijkspiegel zou kunnen hinderen.  
Shroud  
Abschirmung  
Socle de montage au plafond  
Versteviging  
*6 Flat washer–ø 5 mm: x 6  
Scheibe–ø 5 mm: x 6  
Rondelle plate–ø 5 mm: x 6  
Versteviging–ø 5 mm: x 6  
*7 Screws–M5 x 14 mm: x 6  
or M5 x 23 mm: x 6–when using the shroud  
Schrauben–M5 x 14 mm: x 6  
oder M5 x 23 mm: x 6–Wenn das Schirmblech verwendet wird  
Vis–M5 x 14 mm: x 6  
Widescreen monitor  
Breitbildmonitor  
Moniteur à écran large  
Breedbeeld-monitor  
6
*
7
*
ou M5 x 23 mm: x 6–lors de l’utilisation du socle de montage au plafond  
Schroef–M5 x 14 mm: x 6  
of M5 x 23 mm: x 6–Indien de verstijving wordt gebruikt  
– 2 –  
Before mounting the monitor to the ceiling:  
• Perform the required external connections first (see  
reverse page).  
• Wear goggles or protective eyewear to protect your  
eyes especially while drilling the holes.  
• Pay attention not to damage the car interior and its  
fittings and the ceiling of your car.  
Vor der Installation des Monitors an der  
Decke:  
Avant de fixer le moniteur au plafond:  
• Réalisez d’abord les connexions extérieures  
nécessaires (voir la page de dos).  
• Portez des lunettes étanches ou un article de  
lunetterie spécialisé pour protéger vos yeux, et plus  
spécialement pendant le perçage des trous.  
Alvorens de monitor aan het plafond te  
bevestigen:  
• Schließen Sie die externen Anschlüsse zuerst an  
(siehe Rückseite).  
Maak eerst de vereiste externe verbindingen (zie de  
volgende bladzijde).  
• Tragen Sie eine Schutzbrille zum Augenschutz,  
besonders beim Bohren der Löcher.  
• Achten Sie darauf, nicht das Fahrzeuginnere und • Faites attention de ne pas endommager l’intérieur  
Voorkom oogletsel en draag derhalve oogbescherming  
of een veiligheidsbril, vooral tijdens het boren van  
gaten.  
die Befestigungsteile und Decke Ihres Fahrzeugs  
zu beschädigen.  
de la voiture et ses garnitures, ainsi que son  
plafond.  
• Wees voorzichtig zodat u het interieur van de auto, de  
diverse auto-onderdelen en het dak en plafond niet  
beschadigt.  
2
3
4
1
5
Paper template  
Papierschablone  
Gabarit en papier  
Papieren malletje  
6 7 8  
7
1 Nehmen Sie die Deckenleuchte und  
Innendeckenverkleidung vom  
Fahrzeughimmel ab.  
1 Verwijder de koepelverlichting en  
1 Remove the dome light and interior  
1 Retirez le plafonnier et la garniture  
interieur-voering van het plafond.  
headliner from the ceiling.  
intérieure du plafond.  
2 Assemblez les plaques latérales  
2 Monteer de zijplaten en basisplaat.  
• Bepaal eerst de installatieplaat voor de monitor en  
lengte van de gecombineerde zijpanelen.  
2 Assemble the slide plates and the  
2 Montieren Sie die Schiebeplatten  
base plate.  
avec la plaque de base.  
• Déterminez d’abord la position d’installation  
du moniteur et la longueur des panneaux  
latéraux combinés.  
und Basisplatte.  
• Determine the monitor installation position and  
length of combined slide panels first.  
• Bestimmen Sie zuerst die Monitoreinbauposition  
und Länge der kombinierten Schiebeplatte.  
3 Bevestig de gemonteerde platen  
aan de versterking-kruisbalken van  
3 Attach the assembled plates to the  
3 Bringen Sie die montierten Platten  
3 Attachez les plaques assemblées  
het plafond.  
ceiling reinforcement crosspieces.  
• Drill the four holes in the ceiling reinforcement  
crosspieces to meet the mounting holes of the  
assembled plates.  
an den Deckenverstärkung-  
sur les traverses de renforcement  
• Boor vier gaten in de versterking-kruisbalken in  
overeenstemming met de bevestigingsgaten in de  
gemonteerde platen.  
Querstreben an.  
du plafond.  
• Percez quatre trous dans les travers de  
renforcement du plafond au niveau des trous de  
montage des plaques assemblées.  
• Bohren Sie die vier Löcher in den  
Deckenverstärkung-Querstreben, so dass sie  
zu den Montagelöchern an den montierten  
Platten passen.  
4 Voltooi de bedrading en bevestig  
4 Finish wiring then attach the interior  
vervolgens de interieur-voering.  
headliner.  
4 Die Verdrahtung fertigstellen und  
dann die Innendeckenverkleidung  
anbringen.  
4 Terminez le câblage puis attachez  
5 Gebruik het bijgeleverde papieren  
malletje en snij het vereiste  
5 Cut off the headliner using the  
la garniture intérieure.  
supplied paper template.  
5 Coupez la garniture en utilisant le  
gedeelte uit de interieur-voering.  
5 Die Deckenverkleidung mit der  
mitgelieferten Papierschablone  
abschneiden.  
gabarit en papier fourni.  
6 Connect the harness and plugs  
6 Verbind de bundel en stekker van  
from the ceiling to the monitor.  
• For wiring and connections, see the reverse  
side.  
6 Connectez le harnais et les fiches  
het plafond met de monitor.  
du plafond au moniteur.  
• Pour le câblage et les connexions, référez-  
vous à la page de dos.  
• Zie de achterkant van deze bladzijde voor details  
aangaande de bedrading en verbindingen.  
6 Den Kabelbaum und die Stecker von  
der Decke zum Monitor anschließen.  
• Für Verdrahtung und Anschlüsse siehe  
Rückseite.  
7 Attach the shroud and the monitor  
7 Bevestig de verstijving en de  
to the base plate.  
7 Attachez le socle de montage au  
• When using the shroud, the supplied spacers  
should be inserted to be kept the appropriate  
distance between the base plate and the  
shroud.  
monitor op de basisplaat.  
plafond et le moniteur sur la plaque  
7 Schirmblech und Monitor an der  
• De bijgeleverde tussenringen kunnen worden  
geplaatst indien er een vrije ruimte tussen de  
basisplaat en de verstijving moet worden gehouden.  
Indien u met de bijgeleverde tussenringen en  
schroeven niet de juiste afstand tussen de interieur-  
voering en de monitor kunt krijgen, moet u de  
tussenringen en schroeven aanpassen (of koop  
nieuwe van een geschikte lengte).  
de base.  
Basisplatte anbringen.  
• Bei Verwendung des Schirmblechs sollten die  
mitgelieferten Distanzstücke eingesetzt werden,  
um einen geeigneten Abstand zwischen  
Basisplatte und Schirmblech einzuhalten.  
Wenn die mitgelieferten Distanzstücke und  
Schrauben nicht den geeigneten Abstand  
zwischen Innendeckenverkleidung und  
Monitor bewahren können, modifizieren Sie  
die Distanzstücke oder Schrauben (oder  
besorgen Sie solche geeigneter Länge).  
• Les intercalaires fournies peuvent être  
utilisées si une certaine distance doit être  
maintenue entre la plaque de base et le socle  
de montage au plafond.  
If the supplied spacers and screws cannot  
keep the appropriate distance between the  
headliner and the monitor, modify the spacers  
and screws (or obtain those of the appropriate  
length).  
Si les intercalaires et les vis fournies ne  
permettent pas de maintenir la distance  
appropriée entre la garniture et le moniteur,  
modifiez les intercalaires ou les vis (ou  
munissez-vous d’intercalaires et de vis de la  
longueur appropriée).  
8 After mounting the monitor, attach  
8 Bevestig de afdekkingen van de  
koepelverlichting weer nadat u de  
monitor heeft bevestigd.  
the dome light covers.  
8
Nach dem Anbringen des Monitors  
bringen Sie die  
8 Après avoir monté le moniteur,  
attachez les couvercles du  
plafonnier.  
Deckenleuchtenabdeckungen wieder an.  
– 3 –  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
FRANÇAIS  
NEDERLANDS  
ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES ELEKTRISCHE VERBINDINGEN  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, d Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons  
Sie den negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et  
elektrischen Anschlüsse herstellen, bevor das Gerät d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant  
eingebaut wird. Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau d’installer l’appareil. Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir  
des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen Sie es von einem installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par  
Om kortsluiting te voorkomen adviseren wij u om de minpool  
van de accu los te maken en alle elektrische verbindingen tot  
stand te brengen voordat u het apparaat in de auto installeert.  
Als u niet zeker weet hoe u dit apparaat moet installeren,  
kunt u dit beter door een daartoe gekwalificeerde technicus  
laten doen.  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you  
disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make  
all electrical connections before installing the unit. If  
you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have  
it installed by a qualified technician.  
qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.  
un technicien qualifié.  
Note:  
Hinweis:  
Remarque:  
Opmerking:  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC,  
NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your  
vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter  
is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Dieses Gerät ist für den Betrieb in elektrischen  
Anlagen mit 12 V Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung  
ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht über diese  
Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der  
bei JVC-Autoradiofachhändler erworben werden  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des  
sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse  
NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type  
d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de  
tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un revendeur  
d’autoradios JVC.  
Dit apparaat mag worden gebruikt bij elektrische systemen  
die werken op 12 V gelijkstroom met negatieve aarding.  
Als uw auto niet is uitgerust met een dergelijk systeem, is  
een spanningsomzetter vereist. Dit instrument kan worden  
aangeschaft bij JVC auto audiohandelaar.  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified ratings. If kann.  
the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden  
• Vervang de zekering door een exemplaar met het  
aangegeven vermogen.Als de zekering vaak doorslaat, moet  
u uw JVC auto audiohandelaar raadplegen.  
Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si  
le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur  
d’autoradios JVC  
Nennleistung ersetzen. Brennt die Sicherung  
häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC-  
Autoradiofachhändler.  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
.
Typical Connections / Typische Anschlüsse / Raccordements typiques / Normale verbindingen  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez  
Alvorens de verbindingen tot stand te brengen:  
Moet u de bedrading in de auto zorgvuldig. Het apparaat  
kan door verkeerde verbindingen ernstige schade oplopen.  
De draden van het stroomsnoer en van de auto zelf  
kunnen verschillend zijn.  
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug  
sorgfältig überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können  
ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät hervorrufen.  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle  
carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the  
connector from the car body may be different in  
color.  
attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion  
incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.  
Les fils du cordon d’alimentation et ceux du  
connecteur provenant de la voiture peuvent être de  
couleur différente.  
Die Betriebsstrom- und Anschlussleitungen von der  
Autokarosserie können sich in der Farbe unterscheiden.  
1
Die farbigen Leitungen des Betriebsstromkabels an  
die Autobatterie, den Autobeleuchtungssteuerung-  
Schalter und den Türkontakt in der folgenden  
Reihenfolge anschließen.  
1 Verbind de gekleurde draden van het stroomsnoer met  
de auto-accu, de autoverlichtingschakelaar en de  
portiersensor in de volgende volgorde.  
1
Connectez les fils de couleur du cordon d  
à la batterie de la voiture, au commutateur d  
et capteur de porte, dans l ordre suivant.  
alimentation  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord to  
the car battery, the car light control switch, and  
the door sensor in the following sequence.  
éclairage  
1
2
3
4
Zwart: aarde  
1
2
Noir: à la masse  
Jaune: à la batterie de la voiture (12 V  
constant)  
1
2
3
4
Schwarz: an Erde  
Geel: naar de accu van de auto (constant 12 V)  
Rood: naar het aansluitpunt van een accessoire  
Oranje: naar autoverlichtingschakelaar  
1
2
3
4
Black: ground  
Gelb: an die Autobatterie (12 V Gleichstrom)  
Rot: an den Hilfsanschluß  
Orange: Zum Autobeleuchtungssteuerung-  
Schalter  
Yellow: to car battery (constant 12 V)  
Red: to an accessory terminal  
Orange: to car light control switch  
3
4
Rouge: à la prise accessoire  
Orange: au commutateur d’éclairage de la  
voiture  
DOMELIGHT  
5
6
7
Grijs met rode streep: naar portiersensor (DOOR SW)  
DOMELIGHT  
DOMELIGHT  
Zwart met rode streep: aarde (DOMELIGHT)  
Geel met rode streep: naar de accu van de auto  
(constant 12 V)  
DOMELIGHT  
5
6
7
Grau mit rotem Streifen: zum Türkontakt  
5
Gray with red stripe: to the door sensor  
5
6
7
Gris à bande rouge: au capteur de porte  
(DOOR SW)  
(DOOR SW)  
(DOOR SW)  
Schwarz mit rotem Streifen: an Erde  
(DOMELIGHT)  
Gelb mit rotem Streifen: an die Autobatterie  
(12 V Gleichstrom)  
6
7
Black with red stripe: ground (DOMELIGHT)  
Yellow with red stripe: to car battery  
(constant 12 V)  
Noir à bande rouge: à la masse  
(DOMELIGHT)  
Jaune à bande rouge: à la batterie de la  
voiture (12 V constant)  
2 Sluit tot slot de bedrading naar de eenheid aan.  
• Gebruik het verlengsnoer voor het stroomsnoer om  
het aansluiten/ontkoppelen te vergemakkelijken.  
2 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
• Using the joint cord makes the connection/  
disconnection easier.  
2 Schließen Sie zum Schluß den Kabelbaum an das  
2 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à  
Gerät an.  
l’appareil.  
• Durch Verwendung des Verbingungskabels wird  
Anschluss/Abtrennung erleichtert.  
Lutilisation du cordon prolongateur  
d’alimentation rend la connexion/déconnexion  
plus facile.  
Joint cord  
Verbindungskabel  
Cordon de raccordement  
2
Verlengsnoer  
1
Ignition switch  
Zündschalter  
2
*
Interrupteur d’allumage  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Black / Schwarz / Noir / Zwart  
Contactschakelaar  
Zur Metallkarosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Fahrzeugs  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis du véhicule  
Naar de metalen ombouw of chassis van de auto  
2
1
2
*
Yellow*1  
Gelb*1  
Jaune*1  
Geel*1  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch)  
Zu einem stromführenden Anschluß im Sicherungsblock, der an die Autobatterie angeschlossen  
ist (Umgehen des Zündschalters)  
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur  
d’allumage)  
Naar een aansluiting in het zekeringenblok die op de accu is aangesloten (waarbij de ontsteking wordt omzeilt)  
5 A fuse  
Red  
Rot  
5 A-Sicherung  
Fusible 5 A  
5 A zekering  
Fuse block  
Rouge  
Rood  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Zu einem Hilfsanschluß im Sicherungsblock  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
Sicherungsblock  
Porte-fusible  
Zekeringblok  
3
3 A-Sicherung  
3 A fuse  
Naar de aansluiting voor een accessoire in het zekeringenblok  
Orange  
Orange  
Orange  
Oranje  
Fusible 3 A  
3 A zekering  
*1 Before checking the operation of this unit  
prior to installation, this lead must be  
connected, otherwise power cannot be  
turned on.  
*2 Not included with this unit.  
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.  
Non fourni avec cet appareil.  
Niet bij het apparaat inbegrepen.  
To car light control switch  
Zum Autobeleuchtungssteuerung-Schalter  
Au commutateur d’éclairage de la voiture  
Naar autoverlichtingschakelaar  
4
Gray with red stripe  
Grau mit rotem Streifen  
Gris à bande rouge  
Grijs met rode streep  
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit  
des Geräts vor dem Einbau, muß diese  
Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst  
die Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet  
werden kann.  
To the door sensor  
Zum Türkontakt  
Au capteur de porte  
Naar portiersensor  
5
Black with red stripe  
Schwarz mit rotem Streifen  
Noir à bande rouge  
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet  
appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être  
raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut pas être  
mis sous tension.  
2
*
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Zwart met rode streep  
Zur Metallkarosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Fahrzeugs  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis du véhicule  
Naar de metalen ombouw of chassis van de auto  
2
*
6
1 A-Sicherung  
Voordat u controleert of het apparaat werkt  
(alvorens het te installeren), moet deze draad  
aangesloten zijn. Als dit niet het geval is, kan de  
stroom niet worden ingeschakeld.  
1 A fuse  
Yellow with red stripe  
Gelb mit rotem Streifen  
Jaune à bande rouge  
Geel met rode streep  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch)  
Zu einem stromführenden Anschluß im Sicherungsblock, der an die Autobatterie angeschlossen  
ist (Umgehen des Zündschalters)  
Fusible 1 A  
1 A zekering  
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture (en dérivant  
l’interrupteur d’allumage)  
7
Naar een aansluiting in het zekeringenblok die op de accu is aangesloten (waarbij de ontsteking wordt omzeilt)  
To disconnect the harness, unlock the harness using the screw driver or a similar tool, then pull out the harness. (Detach the dome  
light cover prior to this.)  
2
Zum Abtrennen des Kabelbaums lösen Sie den Kabelbaum mit einem Schraubenzieher oder ähnlichen Werkzeug und ziehen den  
Kabelbaum dann ab. (Nehmen Sie vorher die Deckenleuchtenblende ab.)  
Pour déconnecter le harnais, déverrouillez le harnais en utilisant un tournevis ou un outil similaire, puis tirez sur le harnais. (Détachez  
le plafonnier avant de le faire.)  
1
Para desconectar el mazo de conductores, desbloquéelo con un destornillador o herramienta similar y seguidamente, extráigalo. (Antes de  
realizar esto, retire la cubierta de la luz del techo).  
– 4 –  
Connecting the leads / Anschließen der Leitungen / Raccordement des fils / Aansluiting van de gekleurde draden  
CAUTION / VORSICHT / ATTENTION / LET OP!:  
To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with  
Twist the core wires when connecting.  
Die Kerndrähte beim Anschließen verdrehen.  
Torsader les âmes des fils en les raccordant.  
Draai de kerndraden om elkaar heen wanneer u ze  
wilt aansluiten.  
Solder the core wires to connect them securely.  
Die Kerndrähte anlöten, um sie fest anzuschließen.  
Souder les âmes des fils pour les raccorder entre eux de  
façon sûre.  
insulating tape.  
Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen der NICHT  
VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband umwickeln.  
Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS  
utilisés avec de la bande isolante.  
Om kortsluiting te voorkomen, moet u de aansluitklemmen van  
ONGEBRUIKTE gekleurde draden met isolatieband bedekken.  
Soldeer de kerndraden zodat ze stevig vast zitten.  
CONNEXION DE LAUTORADIO  
ET DES APPAREILS EXTÉRIEURS  
CONNECTING TO THE RECEIVER ANSCHLIESSEN AN RECEIVER  
AND EXTERNAL COMPONENTS UND EXTERNE KOMPONENTEN  
VERBINDEN MET EEN RECEIVER  
EN EXTERNE COMPONENTEN  
NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fiches AV1-IN et AV2-  
INPUT du moniteur aux fiches LINE OUT ou  
SUBWOOFER de l’autoradio.  
DO NOT connect the AV1-IN and AV2-INPUT plugs  
on the monitor to the LINE OUT or SUBWOOFER  
plugs of the car receiver.  
Schließen Sie NICHT die Stecker AV1-IN und AV2-  
INPUT am Monitor an die Stecker LINE OUT oder  
SUBWOOFER am Fahrzeug-Receiver an.  
Verbind de AV1-IN en AV2-INPUT aansluitingen van de  
monitor NIET met de LINE OUT of SUBWOOFER  
aansluitingen van de auto-receiver.  
For KV-MRD900 / Für KV-MRD900 / Pour la KV-MRD900 / Voor KV-MRD900  
See also “About sounds reproduced through the terminals” on page 36 of the INSTRUCTIONS.  
Siehe auch „Über von den Rückseitenbuchsen ausgegebenen Ton“ auf Seite 36 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.  
Référez-vous aussi à “À propos des sons reproduits par les prises” à la page 36 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.  
Zie tevens “Meer over het geluid dat via de achter-aansluitingen wordt gereproduceerd” op bladzijde 36 van de  
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING.  
Audio/video control amplifier or the decoder compatible with the multichannel  
digital sources  
Audio/Video-Verstärker oder mit Mehrkanalquellen kompatibler Decoder  
Amplificateur de commande audio/vidéo ou décodeur compatible avec les  
sources numériques multicanaux  
Digital optical cable (not supplied)  
Audio/videoregeling versterker of de decoder compatibel met meerkanaals digitale  
bronnen  
DIGITAL OUT  
Optisches Digitalkabel (nicht mitgeliefert)  
Câble optique numérique (non fourni)  
Digitale optische kabel (niet meegeleverd)  
3
*
AV-OUT  
(or equivalent terminal)  
(oder entsprechende Buchse)  
LINE IN  
(ou prise équivalente)  
(of gelijkwaardige aansluiting)  
Car receiver  
Autoreceiver  
Récepteur d’autoradio  
Autoradio-ontvanger  
AV1-IN  
KV-MRD900  
2nd monitor  
Zweiter Monitor  
2d. moniteur  
2e monitor  
When using the TV tuner system KV-C1001  
Rear panel  
Geräterückseite  
Panneau  
arrière  
Achterpaneel  
AV2-INPUT  
Bei Verwendung des TV-Tunersystems KV-C1001  
Lors de l’utilisation du tuner de télévision KV-C1001  
Bij gebruik van het KV-C1001 TV-tunersysteem  
Antenna elements (supplied with KV-C1001)  
Antennenelemente (mit KV-C1001 mitgeliefert)  
Éléments d’antenne (fournis avec le KV-C1001)  
Antenne-elementen (bijgeleverd bij de KV-C1001)  
KS-HP2  
4
*
4
*
3
*
3
*
Remote sensor unit  
(supplied with KV-C1001)  
Fernbedienungssensoreinheit  
(mit KV-C1001 mitgeliefert)  
Capteur de  
Playback source / Wiedergabesignalquelle / Source de lecture /  
Afspeelbron  
télécommande (fourni  
avec le KV-C1001)  
Afstandsbedieningssensor  
(bijgeleverd bij de KV-  
C1001)  
VCR (KV-V8 or KV-V10)  
Camcorder  
Camcorder  
Caméscope  
Camcorder  
Videorecorder (KV-V8 oder KV-V10)  
Magnétoscope (KV-V8 ou KV-V10)  
Videorecorder (KV-V8 of KV-V10)  
KV-C1001  
*3 RCA-Klinkensteckerkabel (nicht mitgeliefert)  
*4 Videokabel (nicht mitgeliefert)  
*3 RCA-penstekkersnoer (niet meegeleverd)  
*4 Videosnoer (niet meegeleverd)  
*3 Cordon à fiches cinch (non fourni)  
*3 RCA pin plug cord (not supplied)  
*4 Video cord (not supplied)  
*4 Cordon vidéo (non fourni)  
– 5 –  
For KV-MR9010 / Für KV-MR9010 / Pour la KV-MR9010 / Voor KV-MR9010  
Wenn der Receiver mit dem 2nd AUDIO OUT  
Stecker ausgestattet ist  
• When the receiver is equipped with the 2nd  
AUDIO OUT plug  
Si l’autoradio est muni d’une fiche 2nd AUDIO  
OUT  
Indien de receiver een 2nd AUDIO OUT  
aansluiting heeft  
3
*
AV-OUT  
LINE IN  
2nd monitor  
Zweiter Monitor  
VIDEO OUT  
2d. moniteur  
4
2e monitor  
*
2nd AUDIO OUT  
AV1-IN  
Car receiver (ex. JVC KD-DV6101)  
3
*
Autoreceiver (z.B. JVC KD-DV6101)  
Récepteur d’autoradio (ex. JVC KD-DV6101)  
Autoradio-ontvanger (bijv. JVC KD-DV6101)  
KV-MR9010  
AV2-INPUT  
Rear panel  
Geräterückseite  
Panneau  
arrière  
Achterpaneel  
When using the TV tuner system KV-C1001  
Bei Verwendung des TV-Tunersystems KV-C1001  
Lors de l’utilisation du tuner de télévision KV-C1001  
Bij gebruik van het KV-C1001 TV-tunersysteem  
4
*
3
KS-HP2  
*
(not supplied)  
(nicht mitgeliefert)  
(non fourni)  
(niet bijgeleverd)  
Playback source / Wiedergabesignalquelle / Source de lecture /  
Afspeelbron  
Camcorder  
Camcorder  
Caméscope  
Camcorder  
VCR (KV-V8 or KV-V10)  
Videorecorder (KV-V8 oder KV-V10)  
Magnétoscope (KV-V8 ou KV-V10)  
Videorecorder (KV-V8 of KV-V10)  
KV-C1001  
Si vous souhaitez augmenter le niveau du casque  
Beim Höherstellen der Kopfhörerlautstärke steigern  
Sie zunächst den Ausgangspegel des 2nd AUDIO  
OUT am Receiver und stellen dann die  
Kopfhörerlautstärke am Kopfhörer ein.  
Siehe auch BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG des  
Fahrzeug-Receivers.  
Voor het verhogen van het niveau van de hoofdtelefoon,  
moet u eerst het uitgangsniveau van de 2nd AUDIO OUT  
aansluiting van de receiver verhogen.  
• Zie tevens de GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING van uw  
Autoradio-ontvanger  
When increasing the headphones level, first  
d’écoute, augmentez d’abord le niveau de sortie de la  
prise 2nd AUDIO OUT sur l’autoradio, puis ajustez le  
niveau du casque d’écoute sur le casque.  
• Référez-vous aussi au MANUEL D’INSTRUCTION  
de votre autoradio.  
increase output level of the 2nd AUDIO OUT on the  
receiver, then adjust the headphones level on the  
headphones.  
• Refer also to the INSTRUCTIONS of your car  
receiver.  
• When the receiver is NOT equipped with the  
2nd AUDIO OUT plug  
Wenn der Receiver NICHT mit dem 2nd AUDIO  
OUT Stecker ausgestattet ist  
Indien de receiver GEEN 2nd AUDIO OUT  
aansluiting heeft  
• Si l’autoradio n’est PAS muni de fiches 2nd  
AUDIO OUT  
3
*
AV-OUT  
LINE IN  
VIDEO OUT  
2nd monitor  
Zweiter Monitor  
2d. moniteur  
2e monitor  
4
*
AV1-IN  
Car receiver (ex. JVC KD-DV5101)  
Autoreceiver (z.B. JVC KD-DV5101)  
Récepteur d’autoradio (ex. JVC KD-DV5101)  
Autoradio-ontvanger (bijv. JVC KD-DV5101)  
KV-MR9010  
AV2-INPUT  
Rear panel  
Geräterückseite  
Panneau  
arrière  
Achterpaneel  
When using the TV tuner system KV-C1001  
Bei Verwendung des TV-Tunersystems KV-C1001  
Lors de l’utilisation du tuner de télévision KV-C1001  
Bij gebruik van het KV-C1001 TV-tunersysteem  
4
*
3
KS-HP2  
*
(not supplied)  
(nicht mitgeliefert)  
(non fourni)  
(niet bijgeleverd)  
Playback source / Wiedergabesignalquelle / Source de lecture /  
Afspeelbron  
VCR (KV-V8 or KV-V10)  
Camcorder  
Camcorder  
Caméscope  
Camcorder  
Videorecorder (KV-V8 oder KV-V10)  
Magnétoscope (KV-V8 ou KV-V10)  
Videorecorder (KV-V8 of KV-V10)  
KV-C1001  
*3 RCA-Klinkensteckerkabel (nicht mitgeliefert)  
*4 Videokabel (nicht mitgeliefert)  
*3 RCA-penstekkersnoer (niet meegeleverd)  
*4 Videosnoer (niet meegeleverd)  
*3 RCA pin plug cord (not supplied)  
*4 Video cord (not supplied)  
*3 Cordon à fiches cinch (non fourni)  
*4 Cordon vidéo (non fourni)  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTÉS  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
FEHLERSUCHE  
PROBLEMEN OPLOSSEN  
Le fusible saute.  
The fuse blows.  
Die Sicherung brennt durch.  
De zekering brandt door.  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés  
correctement?  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Sind das rote und das schwarze Kabel  
ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen?  
* Zijn de rode en zwarte kabels goed aangesloten?  
Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
De stroom kan niet worden ingeschakeld.  
* Is de gele kabel aangesloten?  
Lappareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
Die Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet  
werden.  
* Ist das gelbe Kabel angeschlossen?  
Picture does not come on screen.  
* Is the correct input selected?  
Er is geen beeld op het scherm.  
* Is de juiste ingang gekozen?  
Aucune image napparaît sur l’écran.  
* Lentrée correcte est-elle choisie?  
Auf dem Bildschirm erscheint kein Bild.  
* Wurde der richtige Eingang ausgewählt?  
Dome lights cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow and red stripe lead connected?  
Koepelverlichting kan niet worden ingeschakeld.  
* Is het gele en rode gestreepte draad aangesloten?  
Le plafonnier ne peut pas être allumé.  
* Le fil à bandes jaune et rouge est-il connecté?  
Deckenleuchte lässt sich nicht einschalten.  
* Ist der gelbe Draht mit rotem Streifen angeschlossen?  
This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
Toestel werkt geheel niet.  
* Heeft u het toestel teruggesteld?  
Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
Dieses Gerät funktioniert überhaupt nicht.  
* Haben Sie Ihr Gerät zurückgesetzt?  
– 6 –  
9-INCH WIDESCREEN MONITOR  
WITH DVD PLAYER  
KV-MRD900  
KV-MRD900  
• This system cannot receive television broadcasts. Use the separately sold TV tuner unit KV-C1000 for  
optional television broadcast reception.  
KV-C1000  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
LVT1342-003A  
[UT]  
WARNINGS  
CAUTION:  
• DO NOT INSTALL THE MONITOR IN A  
LOCATION WHICH OBSTRUCTS DRIVING,  
VISIBILITY, SAFETY DEVICE FUNCTION  
SUCH AS AIR BAGS OR WHICH IS  
PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAWS AND  
REGULATIONS.  
This monitor should be used on DC 12 V only. To  
prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, DO NOT  
use any other power source.  
Installation requires some special  
knowledge.  
Do not install the monitor yourself.  
Consult a dealer having special  
knowledge of this kind for safe and  
reliable installation.  
• There may be legal regulations defining the  
permissible installation locations for the monitor  
which differ by country or by state. Be sure  
to install the monitor in a correct location  
according to such laws.  
• The driver must not operate the monitor while  
driving.  
* Stop your vehicle in a safe location when  
operating the monitor.  
• The driver must not watch the television or  
playback pictures while driving.  
If the driver does it while driving, it may lead to  
carelessness and cause an accident.  
Keep the monitor at an appropriate sound level  
while driving.  
Driving with the sound at a level that prevents  
you from hearing sounds outside of and around  
the vehicle may cause an accident.  
Be sure not to let the monitor fall or be strongly  
impacted since this may cause a malfunction or  
fire.  
CAUTIONS on the supplied headphones  
—KS-HP2:  
• DO NOT leave the headphones in a place  
exposed to direct sunlight for a long  
time, such as a dashboard, as they may be  
damaged.  
• Keep the headphones away from a cellular  
phone to avoid interference.  
• DO NOT turn off the power with the  
volume set at high level, as the sudden  
blast of sound can damage your hearing  
and/or headphones next time you use the  
headphones.  
• If you experience a ringing in your  
ears, reduce volume or stop using the  
headphones.  
Do not use the monitor with the engine off.  
Doing so with the engine off will consume  
battery power and may prevent the engine from  
starting.  
When not in use, close the liquid crystal panel  
and store it into the compartment.  
Do not touch the surface of the liquid crystal  
panel directly.  
Do not hang any object on the monitor or hang  
down, as this may damage the monitor.  
2
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to  
obtain the best possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave  
all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.  
Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
Caution on volume setting:  
This product incorporates copyright  
Discs produce very little noise compared  
protection technology that is protected  
with other sources. Lower the volume  
by U.S. patents and other intellectual  
before playing a disc to avoid damaging  
property rights. Use of this copyright  
the speakers by the sudden increase of the  
protection technology must be authorized  
output level.  
by Macrovision, and is intended for home  
and other limited viewing uses only unless  
otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
3
How to reset your monitor  
How to read this manual  
The following methods are used to make the  
explanations simple and easy-to-understand:  
Some related tips and notes are explained in  
More about this monitor(see pages  
33 35).  
Button operations are mainly explained with  
the illustrations as follows:  
Press briefly.  
This will reset the microcomputer. Your preset  
adjustments will also be erased.  
Press repeatedly.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
If a disc cannot be recognized by the monitor  
or cannot be ejected...  
Press either one.  
Monitor  
The disc comes  
out.  
Press and hold until  
your desired response  
begins.  
(for about 5 seconds  
while power is on)  
• If this does not work, reset your monitor.  
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it  
ejects.  
Press and hold both  
buttons at the same  
time.  
4
Contents  
How to reset your monitor.....................  
How to forcibly eject a disc...................  
How to read this manual........................  
4
4
4
DVD/VCD/JPEG special functions... 21  
Selecting audio languages ..................... 21  
Selecting subtitles.................................. 21  
Selecting the multi-angle views............. 21  
Disc menu operations ............................ 22  
Zoom in.................................................. 22  
Precautions.................................... 6  
Widescreen monitor ....................... 7  
Parts identification.................................  
7
On-Screen disc operations............... 23  
Basic on-screen bar operations.............. 24  
Basic control screen operations ............. 26  
List screen operations............................ 27  
Remote controller RM-RK230 ....... 8  
Main elements and features ...................  
8
Headphones KS-HP2.................... 10  
DVD setup menu ............................ 28  
Main elements and features ................... 10  
Basic setting procedure.......................... 28  
Basic operations ............................. 11  
Maintenance.................................. 31  
Language codes.............................. 32  
More about this monitor................. 33  
Troubleshooting ............................. 37  
Specifications................................. 39  
Adjustments .................................. 13  
Using the monitor menu ........................ 13  
Changing the aspect ratio ...................... 15  
Playable discs................................ 17  
Disc operations .............................. 18  
Playing a disc ................................. 18  
Starting playback................................... 18  
Basic operations..................................... 19  
For safety....  
Temperature inside the car....  
Do not raise the volume level too much, as  
this will block outside sounds, making driving  
dangerous.  
Stop the car before performing any  
complicated operations.  
If you have parked the car for a long time in  
hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature  
in the car becomes normal before operating the  
unit.  
5
Precautions  
Cautions for handling the liquid crystal panel  
Do not expose the liquid crystal panel to direct  
sunlight.  
Do not drop the liquid crystal panel or strike  
it sharply.  
Storage temperature range: 20°C to +80°C  
+80°C  
–20°C  
–20°C to +80°C  
During the summer,  
temperatures can  
reach as high as  
100°C.  
When the temperature is very cold or very  
hot, the image may not appear clearly or may  
move slowly.  
The image may not be synchronized with  
the sound or the image quality may decline  
in such environments. Note that this is not a  
malfunction or problem.  
When the liquid crystal panel reaches high  
temperatures or low temperatures, chemical  
changes occur within the liquid crystal panel  
which may cause it to malfunction.  
Usage temperature range: 0°C to +40°C  
The red spots, blue spots and green spots on  
the panel surface are a normal characteristic of  
liquid crystal panels, and not a problem.  
Spots  
C or colder  
Note:  
The liquid crystal panel is built with very  
high precision technology and has at least  
99.99% effective image pixels. Be aware that  
on 0.01% of the panel there may be missing or  
constantly lit pixels.  
40°C or hotter  
6
Widescreen monitor  
Parts identification  
1
(standby/on) button  
8 Screen (Liquid crystal panel)  
• Turns on the power if pressed.  
• Turns off the power if pressed and held.  
2 Remote sensor  
3 Dome light switch  
See To activate the door sensoron page  
12.  
9 Disc loading slot  
p 0 (eject) button  
q 3 (play) button  
w Disc loading lamp  
e White LED  
r PUSH-OPEN button  
t Screen compartment  
y Screen arm  
4 IR transmitters  
5 Dome lights  
6 Arm lock lever  
7 Reset button  
When you watch the screen at an angle, the picture might not be clear. This is not a malfunction.  
The finest picture can be seen when you watch the screen straight-on.  
7
Remote controller — RM-RK230  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
Main elements and features  
MENU  
Before using the remote controller:  
Aim the remote controller directly at the  
remote sensor on the monitor. Make sure  
there is no obstacle in between.  
Remote sensor  
MONITOR CONTROL  
(standby/on) button  
1
Do not expose the remote sensor to strong  
light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
Turns on the power if pressed.  
Turns off the power if pressed and held.  
2 MODE button  
Selects the playback source.  
3 ASPECT button  
Changes the aspect ratio of the screen.  
4 MENU button  
Warning:  
Do not install any battery other than  
CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it  
may explode.  
Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
Do not recharge, short, disassemble, or  
heat the battery or dispose of it in a fire.  
Do not leave the battery with other  
metallic materials.  
Calls up the menu, then selects the  
adjustable menu items.  
5
/
buttons  
Adjust the level of the selected item or  
select an appropriate setting for selected  
item.  
Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
Wrap the battery with tape and insulate  
when throwing away or saving it.  
8
DVD/RECEIVER CONTROL  
6 Receiver control buttons*1  
How to select a number  
To select a number from 0 9:  
(standby/on attenuator) button  
SOURCE button  
BAND button  
DUAL button  
VOL + / (2nd VOL +/) buttons  
7 TOP M (menu) button*2  
Displays the DVD and VCD*3 disc menu.  
8 SETUP button*2  
9 SHIFT button  
To select a number greater than 9:  
p Disc basic operation buttons  
7 (stop), 3 (play), 8 (pause)  
3 (play) button functions as ZOOM  
button when pressed with SHIFT button.  
q Advanced disc operation buttons  
/TITLE 5 / *4  
Select the titles (for DVD) or folders  
(for MP3/WMA/JPEG)*5.  
4 / ¢ (reverse skip/forward skip)*6  
1 / ¡ (reverse search/forward  
search)*7  
w OSD button  
Displays the on-screen bar.  
Also functions as /TITLE button when  
pressed with SHIFT button.  
+100/100 buttons used only for searching  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks number greater  
than 99.  
You can directly select folders (for  
MP3/WMA/JPEG) or titles (for DVD)  
using the number buttons (see right  
column).  
e MENU button*2  
Displays the DVD and VCD*3 disc menu.  
r Menu operation buttons*2  
Cursor (% , , @ , #) and ENTER  
t RETURN button*2  
y DVD/VCD special function buttons  
DVD/VCD:  
(audio)  
DVD: (subtitle),  
(angle)  
*1 Controllable only if your car receiver which  
is connected to this monitor is one of the  
JVC receivers.  
*2 These buttons function as the number  
buttons when pressed with SHIFT button.  
*3 Only when PBC is not in use.  
*4 These buttons do not function as PRESET  
5 / .  
*5 These buttons function as the +10/–10  
buttons when pressed with SHIFT button.  
*6 These buttons function as the +100/–100  
buttons when pressed with SHIFT button.  
*7 Not used for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.  
9
Headphones KS-HP2  
You can listen to the playback sounds with  
cordless headphonesKS-HP2.  
Main elements and features  
Left side  
Right side  
Installing the batteries  
VOL  
POWER  
Batteries (R03/AAA)  
supplied only for  
initial setup purpose  
1 IR sensors  
DO NOT cover the IR sensors, as  
reception will become poor.  
2 ON/OFF button  
The power automatically shuts off in the  
following cases:  
The headphones are used for about 4  
hours.  
No signal is received for about 4  
minutes.  
You can turn on the power again by  
pressing the button.  
CAUTIONS:  
The supplied batteries are not rechargeable.  
DO NOT recharge them; otherwise, battery  
leakage or explosion may result.  
Insert the batteries with the correct polarity  
+and “–” to prevent the battery leakage  
or explosion.  
3 POWER lamp  
4 Volume control  
Playback sounds are transmitted through IR  
transmitters to the cordless headphones.  
When using the headphones, set the monitor  
menu item IRto ON.(See page 14.)  
Before using the cordless headphones:  
The headphones give best results when used  
within about 2 m from the transmitter.  
These headphones need to receive infrared (IR)  
signals sent from IR transmitters on the monitor.  
Therefore, if you use the headphones where the  
signals cannot be received in a straight line of  
sight, noises may be generated.  
WARNING:  
DO NOT use the headphones while driving.  
Shutting out all outside sounds while driving  
is dangerous and may result in a traffic  
accident.  
IR transmitters  
10  
Basic operations  
Preparation  
Before operating the unit, make sure that all external components are correctly connected and  
installed.  
1
Open the liquid crystal panel.  
Press PUSH-OPEN until the liquid crystal panel is unlocked, then open the liquid crystal  
panel by both hands.  
CAUTION:  
• When not in use, close the liquid crystal panel and store it into the compartment;  
otherwise, it may obstruct the visibility through the rearview mirror.  
• Do not touch the surface of the liquid crystal panel directly.  
When closing the liquid crystal panel, store it in the screen compartment until it is locked.  
To change the monitor position  
You can select a monitor position from the four positions.  
1 Slide the arm lock lever to RELEASE, then pull down or push up the monitor.  
2 Slide the arm lock lever to HOLD, then remove the screen arm to the nearest locking  
position.  
When closing the liquid crystal panel, push up the monitor to the highest position.  
To be continued....  
11  
2
3
Turn on the power.  
Monitor  
Remote control  
Select the playback source.  
MODE  
Each time you press the button, the playback source changes as follows:  
DISC  
AV1  
AV 2  
4
5
Operate the playback source you selected.  
To operate the built-in DVD player, see “Disc operations” on page 18.  
To operate the external components, refer to the manuals for the connected components.  
Adjust the volume on the car receiver.  
When using the headphones, adjust its volume level.  
To turn off the power  
When using the headphones, turn off the power after  
turning off the headphones.  
Monitor  
Remote control  
To activate the door sensor  
OFF: Turns off the dome lights.  
DOOR: Activates the door sensor which turns on the dome lights when a door is open.  
ON:  
Turns on the dome lights.  
12  
Adjustments  
Using the monitor menu  
You can make your own display or sound adjustments using the menu.  
For the adjustable items, see the next page.  
The Remote controllerRM-RK230 has two MENU buttons.  
In this section, using MENU button at MONITOR CONTROL.  
Basic procedure  
1
Call up the menu.  
BRIGHT  
CONTRAST  
TINT  
Current menu item  
COLOR  
IR ON  
DIMMER  
DVD SURROUND OFF  
NTSC / PAL PAL  
WHITE LED ON  
Menu selection goes off if other operations are done or no operation is done for about 5  
seconds.  
2
3
4
Select an item you want to adjust.  
MENU  
Adjust the level of the selected item (or select an appropriate setting for the  
selected item).  
Not used for changing the “DVD SURROUND” setting.  
Exit from the menu.  
Press the button repeatedly until the menu is erased.  
MENU  
13  
Adjustable items on the monitor menu  
BRIGHT:  
Adjust this if the picture is too bright or too dark.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
CONTRAST:  
Control the degree of difference between the lightest and darkest parts of  
the picture.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
TINT:  
COLOR:  
IR*:  
Adjust this if the human skin color is unnatural.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
Adjust the color of the picturelighter or darker.  
Adjustable range: 10 to +11  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
Set to ONwhen you listen to the playback sounds using the cordless  
headphones.  
Selectable settings: ON, OFF  
Initial setting: ON  
DIMMER:  
Adjust the light of the screen and the white LED when you turn on the  
headlights.  
Adjustable range: 5 to +5  
Initial level: 0 (center)  
DVD SURROUND:  
This function allows you to get a surround effect from your stereo  
system. When connecting a receiver incompatible with the multi-channel  
sources, you can enjoy the virtual surround sound with your 2-channel  
stereo system.  
If you turn off the monitor, the setting is initialized.  
Selectable settings: OFF, ACTION, DRAMA, THEATER  
ACTION: Suitable for action movies and sports programs.  
DRAMA: Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy movies in a  
relaxed mood.  
THEATER: Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.  
Initial setting: OFF  
NTSC/PAL:  
Select the color system to match to the incoming signals.  
Selectable settings: PAL, NTSC  
Initial setting: PAL  
Turn off then on the power to activate a new setting when you change the  
setting.  
WHITE LED:  
Light on or off the white LED when you turn on the monitor.  
Selectable settings: ON, OFF  
Initial setting: ON  
* Turn off the headphones before changing the IRsetting.  
14  
Changing the aspect ratio  
You can select an appropriate aspect ratio for the playback video signals.  
Basic procedure  
Each time you press the button, aspect ratio change.  
ASPECT  
Changeable aspect ratio  
When incoming 16:9 video signal:  
FULL:  
Pictures are fully shown on the screen.  
In some cases, the black bars may be shown at the top and  
bottom sides of the screen.  
NORMAL:  
JUST:  
Pictures are reduced horizontally.  
The black bars will be shown at the left and right sides of  
the screen.  
In some cases, the black bars may be shown also at the top  
and bottom sides of the screen.  
The middle of pictures are reduced horizontally, and the left  
and right side of the picture enlarged horizontally.  
In some cases, the black bars may be shown at the top and  
bottom sides of the screen.  
ZOOM:  
Pictures are enlarged on the screen so that no black bars will  
be shown on the screen. (The entire picture cannot be shown  
on the screen.)  
To be continued....  
15  
When incoming 4:3 video signal:  
FULL:  
Pictures are enlarged horizontally and are fully shown on the  
screen.  
NORMAL:  
JUST:  
Pictures are shown at the center of the screen.  
The black bars will be shown at the left and right sides of  
the screen.  
Pictures are enlarged horizontally. The extension ratio  
increases toward the both sides of the screen.  
ZOOM:  
Pictures are enlarged on the screen so that no black bars will  
be shown on the screen. (The entire picture cannot be shown  
on the screen.)  
16  
Playable discs  
Discs you can play  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
You can play back the following discs—12 cm  
and 8 cm —on the built-in DVD player:  
DVD Video: Recorded in the NTSC or PAL  
color system with Region Code 3(see  
below).  
The Non-DVD side of a DualDiscdoes  
not comply with the Compact Disc Digital  
Audiostandard. Therefore, the use of Non-  
DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may  
not be recommended.  
DVD-R/DVD-RW recorded in the DVD  
Video format can also be played (see page  
33).  
Video CD (VCD)/audio CD  
MP3/WMA/JPEG: Recorded either in CD-  
R/CD-RW or DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-ROM.  
CD-R/CD-RW: Compliant with ISO 9660  
Level 1, ISO 9660 Level 2, Romeo, and  
Joliet.  
Digital audio formats  
The unit can play back the following digital  
audio formats.  
Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio,  
the same format used for CDs and most studio  
masters.  
Dolby Digital *2: Compressed digital audio,  
developed by Dolby Laboratories, which  
enables multi-channel encode to create the  
realistic surround sound.  
DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-ROM: Compliant  
with UDF-Bridge Format*1.  
On some discs, the actual operations may be  
different from what is explained in this manual.  
DTS *3 (Digital Theater Systems):  
Compressed digital audio, developed by Digital  
Theater Systems, Inc., which enables multi-  
channel like Dolby Digital. As the compression  
ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it provides  
wider dynamic range and better separation.  
Discs cannot be played back  
DVD-Audio, DVD-ROM (data), DVD-RAM,  
DVD-R/DVD-RW recorded in the DVD-VR  
format, CD-ROM, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo  
CD, etc.  
Playing back these discs will generate noise  
and damage the speakers.  
MPEG Audio: Another compressed digital  
audio which also enables multi-channel encode  
to create the realistic surround sound. However,  
this System downmix the multi-channel signals  
into 2 channels (decoded PCM) and play it  
back.  
Note on Region Code:  
DVD players and DVD Video discs have  
their own Region Code numbers. This unit  
can only play back DVD discs whose Region  
Code numbers include 3.”  
*1 A hybrid file system used to provide  
compatibility with ISO 9660 for accessing  
any type of files on the disc. (UDF stands for  
Universal Disk Format.)  
*2 Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-  
D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
Examples:  
*3 “DTSand DTS 2.0 + Digital Outare  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
If you insert a DVD Video disc of an  
incorrect Region Code  
REGION CODE ERROR!appears on the  
screen. The disc will eject automatically.  
DVD Logois a trademark of DVD Format/  
Logo Licensing Corporation registered in the  
US, Japan and other countries.  
17  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc  
The disc type is automatically detected, and  
playback starts automatically (for DVD:  
automatic start depends on its internal program).  
If “ ” appears on the monitor when  
pressing a button, the disc cannot accept an  
operation you have tried to do.  
In some cases, without showing ,”  
operations will not be accepted.  
If the current disc is an audio CD, CD Text,  
MP3/WMA, JPEG, or VCD without PBC,  
all tracks will be played repeatedly until you  
change the source or eject the disc.  
If a title list or disc menu appears while  
playing a DVD or VCD with PBC, see Disc  
menu operationson page 22.  
Starting playback  
1 Open the liquid crystal panel.  
You can play a disc even if the monitor is  
closed.  
The following marks are used to indicate  
the playable discs....  
2 Turn on the power.  
DVD Video  
Video CD with PBC  
Monitor  
Remote control  
Video CD  
with/without PBC  
Audio CD/  
CD Text  
3 Insert a disc into the loading slot.  
Playback (shining) side facing down  
MP3/WMA disc  
JPEG disc  
All discs listed here  
Before performing any operations, make  
sure the following....  
When a disc is inserted into the loading  
slot, the power comes on, then DISC”  
is selected as the playback source  
automatically.  
For DVD playback, you can change the setup  
menu setting as you like. (See pages 28 30.)  
For DVD/CD playback, using the remote  
controller is more attractive. You can enjoy  
more functions.  
18  
Basic operations  
Operations  
Next operation  
To stop play temporarily  
Playback pauses.  
For JPEG discs: pressing ENTER will also pause the  
picture on the monitor.  
A still picture appears.  
A Frame by frame playback  
B Slow motion playback  
No sound comes out during Slow Motion Playback.  
When playing a VCD, Reverse Slow Motion Playback is  
prohibited.  
To resume normal play:  
To replay the previous  
The playback position moves back about 10 seconds before  
scenesOne Touch Replay the current position.  
This function works only within the same title.  
For some DVDs, this function does not work.  
To stop playback  
When you start playback again, playback  
starts from where it has been stopped  
(Resume play).  
When you start playback again, playback starts from  
the beginning of the last playing track.  
During play, on-screen guide icons appear on the monitor for a while (see page 35).  
To eject the disc  
You can eject the disc even when the monitor is turned off.  
To be continued....  
19  
To go to the next or previous  
chapters/tracks  
To locate a particular title/chapter/  
track directly  
For DVD: During play or pause  
For DVD: During play or pauseselect a  
chapter.  
During stopselect a title.  
For VCD: While PBC (see page 22) is not  
in use.  
To the following  
chapters/tracks.  
For MP3/WMA/JPEG: Select a track  
within the same folder.  
To go back to the beginning of the current  
chapter/track, then the previous chapters/tracks.  
Select the number corresponding to the item  
you want (see page 9).  
To fast-forward or reverse  
the chapter/track  
To locate a title/folder  
Fast-forwards.  
To the next title/folder.  
Reverses.  
To the previous title/folder.  
* The search speed changes to x2 ] x10 for all  
discs (DVD, VCD, CD), but the information  
shown on the monitor is only for DVD/VCD.  
To locate a particular title/  
folder  
To forward or reverse  
search the chapter/track  
Within 10 seconds,  
press the number  
buttons (see page 9).  
The information shown is only for DVD/VCD:  
For MP3/WMA/JPEG discs: To directly  
select the folders using the number button(s),  
it is required that folders be assigned 2 digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder  
names01, 02, 03, and so on.  
To resume normal speed  
20  
DVD/VCD/JPEG special functions  
Selecting subtitles  
Selecting audio languages  
You can select the language of the subtitle  
to be shown on the monitor.  
You can set the initial subtitle language  
using the setup menu (see page 29).  
For DVD:  
You can select the language to listen to if  
the disc has multiple audio languages.  
1/3  
ENGLISH  
1/3  
1/3  
ENGLISH  
1/3  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
Ex.: When the disc has 3 options  
Ex.: When the disc has 3 options  
For VCD:  
You can select the audio channel to  
play. (This is convenient when playing a  
Karaoke VCD.)  
Selecting multi-angle views  
You can view the same scene at different  
angles if the disc has multi-angle views.  
ST  
ST  
1/3  
1
1/3  
ST: To listen to normal stereo (left/right)  
1
playback.  
1/3  
1/3  
L: To listen to the L (left) audio channel.  
1
2
R: To listen to the R (right) audio channel.  
1/3  
3
Ex.: When the disc has 3 multi-angle views  
For some DVDs and VCDs, changing the  
subtitle language, audio language (or audio  
channel) without using the disc menu is  
prohibited.  
21  
Canceling the PBC playback  
1
Disc menu operations  
Menu-driven playback is possible while playing  
back a DVD with menu-driven features or a  
VCD with the PBC (PlayBack Control).  
2 Select a track to start normal playback using  
the number buttons (see page 9).  
While playing a DVD  
To resume the PBC function  
1
A title list or disc menu will appear on the  
monitor.  
Zoom in  
2 Select the item you want on the  
menu.  
1
Selected item starts playback.  
On some discs, you can also select items  
using the corresponding number buttons.  
ZOOM 1  
ZOOM 2  
ZOOM 6  
ZOOM 3  
ZOOM 4  
ZOOM OFF  
ZOOM 5  
For JPEG disc (effective only when  
pausing):  
While playing a VCD  
When a list of items is displayed on the  
monitor.  
ZOOM 1  
ZOOM 2  
ZOOM OFF  
2 Move the zoomed-in portion.  
To select a number greater than 9, see How  
to select a numberon page 9.  
To return to the previous menus  
For JPEG files:  
You cannot move the zoomed-in position  
when the entire picture is displayed on the  
monitor.  
For some discs, you can also move between  
To cancel zoom, select ZOOM OFFin  
the menus by pressing 4 / ¢.  
step 1.  
22  
On-Screen disc operations  
1 Disc type  
2 Audio signal format type (for DVD and  
DTS audio CD)  
PBC (only for VCD)  
3 Playback information  
About the On-Screen Bar  
You can check the disc information and use  
some functions through the on-screen bar.  
For audio CD, CD Text, and MP3/WMA/  
JPEG disc you can also use the control  
screen and list screen (see pages 26 and  
27).  
Current title/chapter  
Current track  
T02-C03  
TRACK 01  
TOTAL  
Elapsed playing time of the disc  
Remaining disc time (for VCD)/  
remaining title time (for DVD)  
T. REM  
On-Screen bars  
TIME  
Elapsed playing time of the  
current chapter/track  
DVD  
Remaining time of the current  
REM  
chapter/track  
4 Playback condition  
2ch  
T02-C03 TOTAL 1:25:58  
DVD-V  
TIME  
TITLE  
CHAP  
OFF  
Playback  
Forward/reverse search  
Forward/reverse slow-motion  
Pause  
VCD  
Stop  
PBC  
TRACK 01 TIME  
REPEAT INTRO RANDOM  
00:36  
VCD  
TIME  
5 Operation icons  
TRACK  
Time indication  
TIME  
Time SearchEnter the elapsed  
playing time of the current title  
or of the disc.  
MP3/WMA  
TITLE  
CHAP  
TRACK  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Track Search  
REPEAT TRACK TIME 00:00:36  
FILE  
REPEAT INTRO RANDOM  
Change the audio language or  
audio channel.  
JPEG  
Change the subtitle language.  
Change the view angle.  
Repeat play (for DVD)  
Repeat play (for other discs)  
Intro play  
OFF  
REPEAT FOLDER  
FILE  
REPEAT  
REPEAT  
INTRO  
Random play  
RANDOM  
CD Text/audio CD  
6 Current playback mode  
*
REPEAT TRACK TIME  
00:36  
5. 1ch  
CD  
REPEAT INTRO RANDOM  
* Only for DTS audio CD  
To be continued....  
23  
To erase the on-screen bar  
Basic on-screen bar operations  
1 Display the on-screen bar.  
For DVD/VCD:  
The on-screen bar for a CD or MP3/WMA/  
JPEG disc automatically disappears in a few  
seconds after the last operation.  
(twice)  
The selectable options for Repeat/Intro/  
Random plays:  
For other discs:  
OFF  
You can repeat the current title or  
chapter.  
2ch  
T02-C03 TOTAL 1:25:58  
DVD-V  
TIME  
DVD (during play or pause):  
TITLE  
CHAP  
OFF  
OFF  
CHAP  
TITLE  
When a JPEG disc is loaded, skip to step 3.  
2 Select an item.  
REPEAT  
You can repeat the current track  
(except for JPEG) or the tracks in  
the current folder (only for MP3/  
WMA/JPEG).  
3 Make a selection.  
VCD (while PBC is not in use):  
REPEAT  
(Canceled)  
If pop-up menu appears....  
1
MP3/WMA:  
REPEAT TRACK  
REPEAT FOLDER  
(Canceled)  
2ch  
T02-C03 TOTAL 1:25:58  
DVD-V  
TIME  
JPEG:  
TITLE  
CHAP  
OFF  
_ _  
(Canceled)  
(Canceled)  
REPEAT FOLDER  
or  
CD Text/audio CD:  
REPEAT TRACK  
2
24  
INTRO  
You can play the first 15 seconds  
of all tracks in the disc, or in the  
current folder (only for MP3/  
WMA).  
To search for a particular point by playing  
time  
For VCD: while PBC is not in use.  
1 Select  
.
2 Enter the elapsed playing time of the current  
VCD (while PBC is not in use):  
title or of the disc.  
INTRO  
(Canceled)  
MP3/WMA:  
INTRO TRACK  
INTRO FOLDER  
(Canceled)  
Ex.: To enter 1 (hours): 02 (minutes): 00  
(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then 0.  
To enter 54 (minutes): 00 (seconds),  
press 0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.  
CD Text/audio CD:  
(Canceled)  
INTRO TRACK  
It is always required to enter the hour  
digit (even 0hour), but it is not required  
to enter trailing zeros (the last two digits  
in the examples above).  
RANDOM  
You can randomly play all tracks  
in the disc, or in the current folder  
(only for MP3/WMA).  
To correct a misentry, press...  
VCD (while PBC is not in use):  
You can also specify the elapsed playing  
RANDOM  
(Canceled)  
time by using % / / @ / #.  
3 Finish the procedure.  
MP3/WMA:  
RANDOM FOLDER  
RANDOM DISC  
(Canceled)  
To search for a particular title/chapter/track  
CD Text/audio CD:  
TITLE  
CHAP  
TRACK  
1 Select  
,
, or  
.
(Canceled)  
RANDOM DISC  
2 Enter the number.  
Refer also page 24 for the following operations.  
To change the time information  
TIME  
1 Select  
.
To correct a misentry, press the number  
2 Change the time information.  
button until the correct number is entered.  
3 Finish the procedure.  
REM 0:11:23  
TOTAL 1:01:58  
TIME 0:00:58  
T. REM 0:35:24  
25  
To select a folder or track  
1 Select Foldercolumn or Trackcolumn  
Basic control screen operations  
You can search for and play the desired items  
through the control screen.  
on the control screen.  
For MP3/WMA/CD Text/audio CD:  
2 Select a folder or track.  
The control screen automatically appears on the  
monitor when you insert a disc.  
If playback does not start,  
press 3 or ENTER.  
JPEG:  
Press TOP M (menu), MENU, or 7.  
For JPEG discs: Pressing ENTER will pause  
Playback stops and the control screen appears.  
the selected picture on the monitor.  
MP3/WMA/JPEG control  
screen  
CD Text/audio CD control  
screen  
REPEAT TRACK TIME  
00:14  
REPEAT TRACK TIME 00:00:14  
Track : 5 / 14  
Folder :  
2 / 3  
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)  
Cloudy  
Fair  
Fog  
Hail  
Indian summer  
Rain  
Shower  
Snow  
Thunder  
Typhoon  
Wind  
01 Music  
02 Music  
03 Music  
Cloudy.mp3  
Fair.mp3  
Fog.mp3  
Hail.wma  
Indian summer.mp3  
Rain.mp3  
Shower.mp3  
Snow.mp3  
Thunder.wma  
Typhoon.mp3  
Wind.mp3  
Track Information  
Album  
Four seasons  
Artist  
Robert M. Smith  
Title  
Rain  
Track Information  
Album  
Weather  
Artist  
Robert M. Smith  
Title  
Winter sky  
Rain  
Winter sky.mp3  
1 Selected playback mode  
2 Elapsed playing time of the current track  
3 Operation mode icon  
Ex.: Control screen for MP3/WMA  
1 Current folder  
2 Current folder number/total folder number  
3 Folder list  
(play), 7 (stop), 8 (pause), ¡ (fast-  
forward), 1 (reverse)  
4 Selected playback mode  
5 Elapsed playing time of the current track  
(only for MP3/WMA)  
4 Current track number/total number of tracks  
on the disc  
5 Track information  
6 Operation mode icon (only for MP3/WMA)  
(play), 7 (stop), 8 (pause)  
6 Track list  
7 Current track (highlighted bar)  
7 Current track number/total number of tracks  
in the current folder (total number of tracks  
on the disc)  
To select a track  
8 Track information (only for MP3/WMA)  
9 Track list  
p Current track (highlighted bar)  
If playback does not start,  
press 3 or ENTER.  
26  
For MP3/WMA/JPEG:  
List screen operations  
While stop...  
You can display the folder list/track list before  
starting play. On this list, you can confirm the  
contents and start playing a disc.  
1 Display the folder list.  
Each time you press the button,  
the list screen comes on and  
goes off.  
Folder/track list  
screens  
2 Select a folder on the list.  
Folder list (MP3/WMA/JPEG)  
Folder : 153/240 Track 154/198  
Page : 4/6  
fol140  
fol141  
fol142  
fol143  
fol144  
fol145  
fol146  
fol147  
fol148  
fol149  
fol150  
fol151  
fol152  
fol153  
fol154  
fol155  
fol156  
fol157  
fol158  
fol159  
fol160  
fol161  
fol162  
fol163  
fol164  
fol165  
fol166  
fol167  
fol168  
fol169  
fol130  
fol131  
fol132  
fol133  
fol134  
fol135  
fol136  
fol137  
fol138  
fol139  
The track list of the selected folder appears.  
To go back to the folder list  
Ex.: Folder list for MP3/WMA  
3 Select a track on the list.  
Track list (MP3/WMA/JPEG/CD Text/audio  
CD)  
Folder : 153/240 Track 154/198  
Page : 4/6  
file0161.wma  
file0162.mp3  
file0163.wma  
file0164.mp3  
file0165.wma  
file0166.wma  
file0167.wma  
file0168.wma  
file0169.mp3  
file0170.wma  
file0131.mp3 file0141.mp3 file0151.wma  
file0132.mp3 file0142.mp3 file0152.mp3  
file0133.wma file0143.mp3 file0153.wma  
file0134.mp3 file0144.mp3 file0154.mp3  
file0135.mp3 file0145.wma file0155.mp3  
file0136.wma file0146.mp3 file0156.mp3  
file0137.wma file0147.wma file0157.mp3  
file0138.mp3 file0148.mp3 file0158.wma  
file0139.mp3 file0149.wma file0159.wma  
file0140.wma file0150.wma file0160.wma  
For JPEG discs: Pressing ENTER will  
pause the selected picture on the monitor.  
For CD Text/audio CD:  
While stop...  
1 Display the track list.  
Each time you press the button,  
the list screen comes on and  
goes off.  
Ex.: Track list for MP3/WMA  
1 Current folder number/total folder number  
(only for MP3/WMA/JPEG)  
2 Select a track on the list.  
2 Current track number/total number of tracks  
in the current folder (for MP3/WMA/JPEG)  
or in the disc (for CD Text/audio CD)  
3 Current page/total number of the pages  
included in the list  
4 Current folder/track (highlighted bar)  
27  
DVD setup menu  
You can store the initial disc playback status.  
While playing, no change can be made on the  
setup menu.  
4
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
STREAM/PCM  
DOWN MIX  
STEREO  
DOLBY SURROUND  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
Basic setting procedure  
While stop...  
5 Select an option.  
1
AUDIO  
LANGUAGE  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
MENU LANGUAGE  
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
SUBTITLE  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
STEREO  
DOLBY SURROUND  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
2
6
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
DOLBY SURROUND  
ON  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
Ex.: When selecting the “AUDIO” menu  
To set other items on the same menu  
Repeat steps 3 to 6.  
3 Select an item you want to set up.  
To set other items on other menus  
Repeat steps 2 to 6.  
AUDIO  
To return to the normal screen  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
DOWN MIX  
STREAM/PCM  
STEREO  
ON  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
Ex.: When selecting “DOWN MIX”  
28  
LANGUAGE menu  
Item  
Contents  
Select the initial disc menu language.  
MENU LANGUAGE  
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
SUBTITLE  
Select the initial audio language.  
Select the initial subtitle language or erase the subtitle (OFF).  
Select the language for the setup menu and some indications shown on  
the monitor.  
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
For the LANGUAGE settings, see also the language codes list on page 32.  
PICTURE menu  
Item  
Contents  
Select the monitor type to watch a wide screen picture on your  
external monitor.  
16:9 : Select this when the aspect ratio of your monitor is  
16:9.  
MONITOR TYPE  
16:9  
4:3 LETTER BOX  
4:3 LETTER BOX : Select this when the aspect ratio of your  
monitor is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black  
bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.  
4:3 PAN SCAN : Select this when the aspect ratio of your  
monitor is 4:3.  
4:3 PAN SCAN  
While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not  
appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will  
not be shown on the screen.  
Select the on-screen bar position on the monitor.  
1 : Higher position  
2 : Lower position (Help screen under the DVD setup menu  
disappears.)  
OSD POSITION  
Position 1  
Position 2  
If both MP3/WMA files and JPEG files are recorded on a disc,  
you can select which files to play.  
MP3/JPEG  
MP3 : Select this for playing MP3/WMA files.  
JPEG : Select this for playing JPEG files.  
Eject the disc and insert it again to make the new setting  
effective.  
To be continued....  
29  
AUDIO menu  
Item  
Contents  
Select the signal format to be emitted through the DIGITAL OUT  
(Optical) terminal. For details, see page 36.  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
PCM ONLY : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a  
decoder incompatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio, or  
connecting to a recording device.  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM : Select this when connecting an  
amplifier or a decoder compatible with Dolby Digital.  
STREAM/PCM : Select this when connecting an amplifier or a  
decoder compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG Audio.  
When playing back a multi-channel DVD disc, this setting affects  
the signals reproduced through the analog terminalsAV-OUT and  
cordless headphones (and through the DIGITAL OUT terminal when  
PCM ONLYis selected for DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT).  
DOLBY SURROUND : Select this when you want to enjoy multi-  
channel surround audio by connecting an amplifier compatible with  
Dolby Surround to this monitor.  
DOWN MIX  
STEREO : Normally select this.  
You can enjoy a powerful sound at low or middle volume levels while  
playing a Dolby Digital software.  
D. (Dynamic) RANGE  
COMPRESSION  
AUTO : Select this to apply the effect to multi-channel encoded  
software (excluding 1-channel and 2-channel software).  
ON : Select this to always use this function.  
30  
Maintenance  
To prevent damage to the exterior  
How to handle discs  
Center holder  
Do not apply pesticides, benzine, thinner or  
other volatile substances to the monitor.  
The cabinet surface primarily consists of  
plastic materials.  
When removing a disc from  
its case, press down the center  
holder of the case and lift the  
disc out, holding it by the edges.  
• Always hold the disc by the  
Do not wipe with benzine, thinner or similar  
substances because this will results in  
discoloration or removal of the paint.  
When a cloth with a cleansing chemical is  
used, follow the caution points.  
edges. Do not touch its recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert  
the disc around the center holder (with the  
printed surface facing up).  
Do not leave the unit in contact with rubber  
or vinyl products for long periods of time.  
Do not use cleansers which have polishing  
granules because this could damage the  
cabinet.  
Make sure to store discs into the cases after  
use.  
To keep discs clean  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe  
it with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
Do not use any solvent (for  
example, conventional record cleaner, spray,  
thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.  
Clean off dirt by wiping lightly with  
a soft cloth  
When the cabinet is very dirty, wipe with a  
well-wrung cloth dipped in a kitchen cleanser  
(neutral) thinned by water and then go over the  
same surface with a dry cloth.  
(Since there is the possibility of water drops  
getting inside of the unit, do not directly apply  
cleanser to the surface.)  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough  
spots around the inner and outer  
edges. If such a disc is used, this  
unit may reject the disc.  
Moisture condensation  
To remove these rough spots, rub  
the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the  
DVD player in the following cases:  
After starting the heater in the car.  
If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the DVD player may  
malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and  
leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the  
moisture evaporates.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Warped  
disc  
Sticker  
Sticker  
residue  
Stick-on  
label  
Disc  
31  
Language codes  
Code  
Language  
Code  
Language  
Code  
Language  
AA  
AB  
AF  
AM  
AR  
AS  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BE  
BG  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DZ  
EL  
EO  
ET  
EU  
FA  
FI  
Afar  
IK  
IN  
IS  
IW  
JI  
Inupiak  
RN  
RO  
RW  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SH  
SI  
Kirundi  
Rumanian  
Kinyarwanda  
Sanskrit  
Sindhi  
Sangho  
Serbo-Croatian  
Singhalese  
Slovak  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Ameharic  
Arabic  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Byelorussian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Bengali, Bangla  
Tibetan  
Breton  
Catalan  
Corsican  
Czech  
Welsh  
Bhutani  
Greek  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Basque  
Persian  
Finnish  
Fiji  
Faroese  
Frisian  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Hebrew  
Yiddish  
JW  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
LT  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Greenlandic  
Cambodian  
Kannada  
Korean (KOR)  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
SK  
SL  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Siswati  
Sesotho  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Tamil  
Telugu  
Tajik  
Thai  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Setswana  
Tonga  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
Kirghiz  
Latin  
Lingala  
ST  
Laothian  
Lithuanian  
Latvian, Lettish  
Malagasy  
Maori  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Mongolian  
Moldavian  
Marathi  
Malay (MAY)  
Maltese  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
SU  
SW  
TA  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
TK  
TL  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
TW  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
VO  
WO  
XH  
YO  
ZU  
LV  
MG  
MI  
MK  
ML  
MN  
MO  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
NO  
OC  
OM  
OR  
PA  
PL  
FJ  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
Irish  
Scots Gaelic  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Twi  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
(Afan) Oromo  
Oriya  
Panjabi  
Uzbek  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Wolof  
Xhosa  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
Hindi  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Polish  
PS  
PT  
QU  
RM  
Pashto, Pushto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-Romance  
IE  
32  
More about this monitor  
Basic operations  
Turning off the power  
If you turn off the power while listening to a  
disc, disc play will start automatically, next  
time you turn on the power.  
DVD/VCD/JPEG special functions  
For some DVDs and VCDs, changing the  
subtitle language, audio language (or audio  
channel) without using the disc menu is  
prohibited.  
While zoomed in, the picture may look  
coarse.  
Disc operations  
General  
Playing a DVD-R/DVD-RW or CD-R/CD-  
RW  
In this manual, words trackand fileare  
interchangeably used when referring to MP3/  
WMA/JPEG files and their file names.  
This unit can also playback 8 cm discs.  
This unit can only playback audio CD (CD-  
DA) files if different type of files are recorded  
in the same disc.  
Use only finalizeddiscs.  
This unit can play back only the files of the  
same type which is first detected if a disc  
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and  
MP3/WMA/JPEG files.  
This unit can play back either MP3/WMA  
files or JPEG files if a disc includes both kind  
of files. Set the playback file type on DVD  
setup menu (page 29) before playing back a  
disc containing both kind of files.  
Only for CD-R/CD-RW: This unit can play  
back multi-session discs; however, unclosed  
sessions will be skipped while playing.  
Some DVD-R/DVD-RW or CD-R/CD-  
RW may not play back on this unit because  
of their disc characteristics, and for the  
following causes:  
The first track will be skipped if a different  
type of file is detected first.  
When a disc has been loaded, selecting  
DISCfor the playback source starts disc  
play.  
Starting playback  
When a disc is inserted upside down, NO  
DISCappears on the screen, then the disc  
will automatically eject.  
You can play a disc even if the monitor is  
closed.  
Discs are dirty or scratched.  
Moisture condensation occurs on the lens  
inside the unit.  
Basic operations  
No sound comes out during slow motion  
playback. When playing a VCD, reverse slow  
motion playback is prohibited.  
One Touch Replay works only within the  
same title. (For some DVDs, this function  
does not work.)  
When playing a DVD/VCD, no sound comes  
out during Search.  
The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are  
written with Packet Writemethod.  
DVD-R/DVD-RW which are not written  
in UDF-Bridge Format (eg. UDF format or  
ISO format).  
There are improper recording conditions  
(missing data, etc.) or media conditions  
(stain, scratch, warp, etc.).  
DVD-RW/CD-RW may require a longer  
readout time since the reflectance of DVD-  
RW/CD-RW is lower than that of regular  
discs.  
Reverse search stops automatically when it  
reaches the beginning of the disc. Playback  
resumes at normal speed.  
To be continued....  
33  
Do not use the following DVD-R/DVD-RW  
or CD-R/CD-RW:  
This unit can play back the files recorded in  
VBR (variable bit rate).  
Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal  
stuck to the surface.  
Discs on which labels can be directly  
printed by an ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or  
high humidities may cause malfunctions or  
damages to discs.  
The files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy  
in elapsed time display, and do not show  
the actual elapsed time. Especially, after  
performing the search function, this  
difference becomes noticeable.  
This unit cannot play back the following files:  
MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO  
format.  
MP3 files encoded in an unappropriated  
format.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>  
(regardless of the letter caseupper/lower)  
recorded in either CD-R/CD-RW or in  
DVD-R/DVD-RW.  
This unit can show the names of albums,  
artists (performer), and ID3 Tag (Version 1.0,  
1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and WMA  
files.  
This unit can display only one-byte  
characters. No other characters can be  
correctly displayed.  
This unit can play back MP3/WMA files  
meeting the conditions below:  
MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
WMA files encoded with lossless,  
professional, and voice format.  
WMA files which are not based upon  
Windows Media® Audio.  
WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
WMA files recorded with MBR (Multiple  
Bit Rate) format.  
Files which have the data such as WAVE,  
ATRAC3, etc.  
Playing a JPEG disc  
This unit can play back JPEG files with the  
extension code <.jpg> (regardless of the letter  
caseupper/lower) recorded in either CD-R/  
CD-RW or in DVD-R/DVD-RW.  
Bit rate: MP3: 32 kbps 320 kbps  
WMA: 32 kbps 192 kbps  
Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for WMA)  
Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name  
The maximum number of characters for file/  
folder names vary among the disc format used  
(includes 4 extension characters<.mp3> or  
<.wma>).  
It is recommended that you record a file  
at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file has been  
recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x  
480, it will take a long time to be shown.)  
This System can play only baseline JPEG  
files. Progressive JPEG files or lossless JPEG  
files cannot be played.  
Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital  
cameras, web, etc.  
ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
Romeo: up to 128 characters  
Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.  
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely  
used now.  
Joliet: up to 64 characters  
Windows long file name: up to 128  
characters  
This unit can recognize the total of  
1100 files, 250 folders (maximum of 999 files  
per folder).  
If progressive or lossless JPEG files are  
played back, a black screen appears. In this  
case, stop playback and select a baseline  
JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to  
select another file.  
34  
Even if you try to pause the current picture,  
it may be skipped, then the next picture will  
pause.  
This unit can recognize the total of 1100  
files, 250 folders (maximum of 999 files per  
folder).  
On-screen guide icons  
During play, the following guide icons may  
appear for a while on the monitor.  
: Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-audio languages (for  
DVD only).  
Changing the source  
If you change the source, playback also stops  
(without ejecting the disc).  
Next time you select DISCfor the playback  
source, disc play starts automatically.  
:
Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-subtitle languages  
(for DVD only).  
: Appears at the beginning of a scene  
containing multi-angle views (for  
DVD only).  
Ejecting a disc  
: Play  
If the ejected disc is not removed within  
15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted  
again into the loading slot to prevent it from  
dust. (Disc will not play this time.)  
: Pause  
: Forward slow motion playback  
(for DVD and VCD only)  
: Reverse slow motion playback  
(for DVD only)  
DVD setup menu  
When the language you have selected is not  
recorded on a disc, the original language is  
automatically used as the initial language. In  
addition, for some discs, the initial languages  
settings will not work as you set due to their  
internal disc programming.  
: Forward search  
: Reverse search  
While playing (or pausing), you cannot  
change these languages.  
After you change any of these language  
settings, eject the disc and insert it (or another  
disc) again so that your setting takes effect.  
When you select 16:9for a picture whose  
aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes  
due to the process for converting the picture  
width.  
Even if 4:3 PAN SCANis selected, the  
screen size may become  
4:3 LETTER BOXwith some DVDs. This  
depends on how they are recorded.  
35  
About sounds reproduced through the terminals  
Through the analog terminals (AV-OUT/cordless headphones): 2-channel signal is emitted.  
When playing a multi-channel encoded disc, multi-channel signals are downmixed.  
(AUDIODOWN MIX: see page 30.)  
Through DIGITAL OUT (optical):  
Digital signals (Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG Audio) are emitted through this  
terminal. (For more details, see table below.)  
To reproduce multi-channel sounds such as Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG Audio, connect  
an amplifier or a decoder compatible with these multi-channel sources to this terminal, and set  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTcorrectly. (See page 30.)  
Output signals through the DIGITAL OUT terminal  
Output signals are different depending on the DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTsetting on the setup  
menu (see page 30).  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
Output Signals  
Playback Disc  
STREAM/PCM  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM  
PCM ONLY  
DVD  
48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits Linear PCM  
96 kHz, Linear PCM  
with DTS  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
DTS bitstream  
Dolby Digital bitstream  
MPEG bitstream  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
DTS bitstream 44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo Linear PCM  
48 kHz, 16 bits  
with Dolby Digital  
stereo Linear PCM  
with MPEG Audio  
48 kHz, 16 bits Linear PCM  
Audio CD, Video CD  
Audio CD with DTS  
MP3/WMA  
36  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service  
center.  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Colored spots (red, blue  
and green) appear on the  
screen.  
This is a characteristic of  
liquid crystal panels and is  
not a malfunction.  
See Noteon page 6.  
No picture appears and  
sound is not heard.  
The cord is not connected  
correctly to the external  
component.  
Connect the cord correctly.  
Correct input mode is not  
selected.  
Select the correct input  
mode.  
The unit does not work at  
all.  
The built-in microcomputer Reset the unit (see page 4).  
may have functioned  
incorrectly due to noise, etc.  
Remote controller does not The battery has lost its  
Install a new battery.  
work.  
charge.  
Cordless headphones do  
not work.  
The sensor is exposed to  
strong light.  
Do not expose the sensor to  
strong light.  
Howling occurs from  
the speakers or the  
headphones.  
It may be caused by a  
camcorder connected to the  
monitor.  
Camcorder is now in  
recording mode. Deactivate  
the recording mode.  
• “NO DISCappears on the Disc is inserted upside  
screen. down.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
CD-R/CD-RW or DVD-R/ CD-R/CD-RW or DVD-R/  
DVD-RW cannot be played DVD-RW is not finalized.  
back.  
Insert a finalized CD-  
R/CD-RW or DVD-R/  
DVD-RW.  
Tracks on the CD-R/  
CD-RW or DVD-R/  
DVD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
Finalize the CD-R/CD-  
RW or DVD-R/DVD-RW  
with the component which  
you used for recording.  
The left and right edges of 4:3 PAN SCANis  
Select 4:3 LETTER BOX.”  
the picture are missing on selected when viewing on  
(See page 29.)  
the screen.  
a conventional TV (aspect  
ratio 4:3).  
37  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Sound and picture are  
sometimes interrupted or  
distorted.  
You are driving on rough  
roads.  
Stop playback while driving  
on rough roads.  
Disc is scratched.  
Change the disc.  
Connections are incorrect.  
Check the cords and  
connections.  
The playback pictures  
cannot be shown correctly. PAL) is not correct.  
The color system (NTSC/  
Set it correctly (see page  
14).  
Disc cannot be played  
back.  
No MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks Change the disc.  
are recorded on the disc.  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks do Add the extension code  
not have the extension code <.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.jpg>  
<.mp3>, <.wma>, or <.jpg> to their file names.  
in their file names.  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks are Change the disc.  
not recorded in a compliant  
format.  
Record MP3/WMA/JPEG  
tracks using a compliant  
application (see page 17).  
MP3/WMA/JPEG tracks  
are recorded in DVD+R/  
DVD+RW media.  
Change the disc.  
Record MP3/WMA/JPEG  
tracks using DVD-R/DVD-  
RW media.  
Noise is generated.  
The track played back is not Skip to another track or  
an MP3/WMA file (although change the disc. (Do not add  
it has the extension code  
<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
the extension code <.mp3>  
or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
A longer readout time is  
Readout time varies due to  
Do not use too many  
required.  
the complexity of the folder/ hierarchies and folders.  
file configuration.  
Tracks cannot be played  
Playback order is determined  
back as you have intended when the files are recorded.  
them to play.  
Elapsed playing time is not This sometimes occurs  
correct.  
during play. This is caused  
by how the tracks are  
recorded on the disc.  
38  
Specifications  
WIDESCREEN MONITOR  
GENERAL  
Screen:  
Power requirement:  
Operating voltage:  
9 inch liquid crystal panel  
Number of pixel:  
DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)  
336 960 pixels  
(480 vertical × 234 horizontal × 3)  
Drive method:  
Grounding system: Negative ground  
Allowable operating temperature:  
0°C to +40°C  
TFT (Thin Film Transistor) active matrix  
format  
Allowable storage temperature:  
20°C to +80°C  
Cordless audio:  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Installation size (approx.):  
215 mm × 49 mm × 374 mm  
Mass (approx.):  
Infrared audio transmitter  
L-channel: 2.3 MHz  
R-channel: 2.8 MHz  
Effective listening angle: 30˚  
Effective range: 2 m  
Color system: NTSC/PAL  
Input:  
2.9 kg (excluding accessories)  
CORDLESS HEADPHONES  
Type: Open-air type  
Driver unit:  
30 mm Mylarcone dynamic speaker  
Impedance: 16  
Video: RCA pin × 2 circuits  
1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Audio: RCA pin × 2 circuits  
1.5 V(rms)  
Frequency response: 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Infrared wavelength: 850 nm 50 nm  
Power requirements:  
DC 3 V (2.4 V to 3.3 V allowance)  
(R03/AAA battery × 2)  
Mass (approx.):  
Output:  
Video: RCA pin × 1 circuit  
1 V(p-p), 75 Ω  
Audio: RCA pin × 1 circuit  
1.5 V(rms)  
DIGITAL OUT: Optical  
170 g (except batteries)  
Allowable operating temperature:  
30°C to +65°C  
DVD/CD PLAYER SECTION  
Signal detection system: Non-contact optical  
pickup (semiconductor laser)  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
Number of channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency response:  
Microsoft and Windows Media are either  
registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
DVD, fs=48 kHz/96 kHz:16 Hz to 22 000 Hz  
VCD, CD:  
Dynamic range:  
16 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
93 dB  
Signal-to-noise ratio: 95 dB  
Wow and flutter: Less than measurable limit  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3):  
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio):  
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps  
39  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN, CT  
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0305MNMMDWJEIN  
KV-MRD900  
Installation/Connection Manual  
安裝/連接手冊  
°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß  
0305MNMMDWJEIN  
EN, CT, TH  
LVT1342-004A  
[A, U, UT]  
中文  
ENGLISH  
‰∑¬  
警告  
§”‡µÕπ  
WARNING  
Installation requires some special knowledge.  
Do not install the monitor yourself. Consult a dealer having  
special knowledge of this kind for safe and reliable  
installation.  
必須要有安裝方面特殊的知識方可進行安裝工作。請勿自行安  
裝監視器系統。為安全起見和可靠的安裝,請洽詢有專門知識  
的經銷商。  
º∑”°“√µ¥µß®”‡ªπµÕß¡§«“¡√§«“¡™”π“≠ Õ¬“µ¥µß¥  
ÿ
®Õ¿“楫¬µ«∑“π‡Õß  
‚ª√¥ª√°…“°∫µ«·∑π®”Àπ“¬∑¡§«“¡π¥“ππ ∑ßπ‡æÕ°“√µ¥µß∑ª≈Õ¥¿  
¬·≈–‡™Õ„®‰¥  
• DO NOT INSTALL THE MONITOR IN A LOCATION WHICH  
OBSTRUCTS DRIVING, VISIBILITY, SAFETY DEVICE  
FUNCTION SUCH AS AIR BAGS OR WHICH IS PROHIBITED  
BY APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS.  
If the monitor is installed in a location which obstructs forward  
visibility or operation of the air bag or other safety equipment or  
which interferes with operation of the vehicle, it may cause an  
accident.  
Õ¬“µ¥µß®Õ¡Õπ‡µÕ√ „πµ”·Àπß∑Õ“®°¥¢«“ß°“√¢∫¢ ∑»π« ¬  
請勿將監視器安裝在妨礙駕駛,影響視線,阻礙空氣袋等保險裝  
置功能或違反交通法律和規則之處。  
°“√∑”ß“π¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥π√¿¬ ‡™π ·Õ√·∫§ À√Õµ”·Àπß∑À“¡¡Àµ¥µß  
若將監視器裝在諸如影響前方視線,影響氣袋和其它安全裝置  
的操作以及妨礙車輛操縱之處時,可能會導致事故的發生。  
µ“¡°ÆÀ¡“¬ À√Õ√–‡∫¬∫™∫ß§∫  
¬„π°“√¡Õ߇Àπ¿“æ¢“ßÀπ“ À√Õ¢¥¢«“ß°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß∂ß  
ÿ
≈¡π√¿¬ À√ÕÕª  
ÿ
°√≥π√¿  
¬ÕπÊ À√Õ∑¢¥¢«“ß°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß√∂¬πµ Õ“®°Õ„À‡°¥Õ  
ÿ
ÿ
切勿使用車輛安全裝置上的螺栓和螺母來進行安裝。  
若使用輪胎轉向器,制動器或其它安全裝置上的螺栓和螺母來  
安裝監視器時,可能會導致事故的發生。  
À“¡π” ≈°‡°≈¬«À√Õµ«πÕµ®“°Õ  
ÿ
• NEVER USE BOLTS OR NUTS FROM THE VEHICLE’S  
SAFETY DEVICES FOR INSTALLATION.  
If bolts or nuts from the steering wheel, brakes or other safety  
devices are used for installation of the monitor, it may cause an  
accident.  
À“°¡°“√π” ≈°‡°≈¬«À√Õµ«πÕµ®“°æ«ß¡“≈¬ ‡∫√°À√ÕÕ  
ÿ
¡“„™„π°“√µ¥µß®Õ¿“æ Õ“®°Õ„À‡°¥Õÿ∫µ‡Àµÿ‰¥  
正確連接導線。  
若沒有正確接線,可能會導致火災或意外。特別一定要注意伸  
展和保護引線,使其與螺絲釘或座位把手的移動部位不發生纏  
結。  
µÕ “¬‰øÀ∂°µÕß  
• ATTACH THE WIRES CORRECTLY.  
À“° “¬‰ø∑”ß“π‰¡∂°µÕß Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥‰ø‰À¡À√ÕÕ  
ÿ
If the wiring is not correctly performed, it may cause a fire or an  
accident. In particular, be sure to run and secure the lead wire  
so that it does not get tangled with a screw or the moving portion  
of a seat rail.  
∫µ‡Àµÿ‰¥ §«√µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π·≈–µÕ “¬‰øÕ¬“ß·ππÀπ“  
‡æÕ∑ “¬‰ø®–‰¡æπ°∫πÕµ À√Õ√“ß∑πß∑‡≈Õπ‰ª¡“‰¥  
請使用帶直流 12 V 負極接地的車輛。  
此監視器系統僅限於直流 12 V 負極接地的車輛。  
此監視器系統不能用直流 24 V 的負極接地的大型卡車或柴油  
機。  
• USE WITH DC 12 V NEGATIVE GROUND VEHICLES.  
This monitor is only for use in a DC 12 V negative ground vehicle.  
It cannot be used in large trucks or diesel vehicles which are DC  
24 V vehicles.  
If it is used in the wrong type of vehicle, it may cause a fire or  
accident.  
„™°∫√∂∑µÕ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß¢π“¥ 12 V  
ÿ¥®Õ¿“æπ„™‰¥°∫√∂∑µÕ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß¢π“¥ 12 V ‡∑“ππ  
若將其用錯車型,可能導致火災或事故的發生。  
‰¡ “¡“√∂„™‰¥° ∫√∂∫√√∑°  
ÿ
¢π“¥„À≠À√Õ√∂¬πµ¥‡´≈∑„™‰øø“°√–· µ√ß¢π“¥ 24 V  
∫ µ‡Àµ‰¥  
À“°π”‰ª„™°∫√∂º¥ª√–‡¿∑ Õ“®°Õ„À‡°¥‰ø‰À¡À√ÕÕ  
ÿ
ÿ
為了防止短路,建議您拔掉電池的負極端子並在安裝本機之前  
做好所有電線的連接。若您不能確保正確安裝本機,請求助合  
格的技術人員進行連接。  
• To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect  
the battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections  
before installing the unit. If you are not sure how to install this  
unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
‡æÕªÕß°π‰øø“≈¥«ß®√ ¢Õ·π–π”„À∂Õ¥¢« “¬‰ø≈∫¢Õß·∫µ‡µÕ√ÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈–  
∑”°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ‰øø“∑ßÀ¡¥°Õπµ¥µß™  
‚ª√¥„À™“ߺ™”π“≠µ¥µß„À  
ÿ¥®Õ¿“æ À“°‰¡·π„®«∏°“√µ¥µß∑∂°µÕß  
請勿在下列地點安裝監視器。  
妨礙安全駕駛之處。  
暴露於陽光直射或散熱源直接散熱處以及高溫處。  
易受雨淋,濺水或過度潮濕之處。  
易落塵埃之處。  
不牢固之處。  
損傷車輛零件之處。  
通風不良之處請務進行安裝。  
• Avoid installing the monitor in the following places  
– Where it would hinder your safe driving.  
– Where it would be exposed to direct sunlight or heat directly  
from the heater or placed in an extremely hot place.  
– Where it would be subject to rain, water splashes or excessive  
humidity.  
– Where it would be subject to dust.  
– Where it would be positioned on an unstable place.  
– Where it could damage the car’s fittings.  
À≈°‡≈¬ß°“√µ¥µß®Õ¿“æ„π®ÿ¥µÕ‰ªπ  
- µ”·Àπß∑Õ“®‡ªπÕÿª √√§µÕ°“√¢∫¢∑ª≈Õ¥¿¬  
- µ”·Àπß∑√∫· ßÕ“∑µ¬‚¥¬µ√ßÀ√Õ‰¥√  
∫§«“¡√Õπ®“°‡§√Õß∑”§«“¡√Õπ À√Õ„πµ”·Àπß∑√Õ𮥠 
- µ”·Àπß∑Õ“®∂°Ωπ π” “¥À√Õ¡§«“¡™π ß  
- µ”·Àπß∑Õ“® ¡º Ω  
ÿπ≈–ÕÕß  
– Where proper ventilation would not be maintained.  
- µ”·Àπß∑µßÕ¬„π®¥∑‰¡¡π§ß  
ÿ
- µ”·Àπß∑Õ“® √“ß§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬„À°∫Õ  
- „π∑∑¡Õ“°“»∂“¬‡∑‰¡ –¥«°  
ÿª°√≥√∂¬πµ  
小心  
各個國家或洲有其法律規定允許安裝監視器的地點,因此務  
必安裝彩色監視器於符合法律規定的地點。  
CAUTION  
Since there may be legal regulations defining the permissible  
installation locations for the monitor which differ by country or  
by state, be sure to install the color monitor in a location  
complying with any such laws.  
¢Õ§«√√–«ß  
‡πÕß®“°Õ“®¡°Æ√–‡∫¬∫∑“ß°ÆÀ¡“¬  
°”Àπ¥µ”·Àπß∑‡À¡“– ¡„π°“√µ¥µß®Õ¿“æ ´ß·µ°µ“ß°π„π·µ≈–ª√–‡∑»  
À√Õ·µ≈–√∞ ¥„À·π„®«“‰¥µ¥µß®Õ¿“æ  
‰«„πµ”·Àπßµ“¡∑°ÆÀ¡“¬¥ß°≈“«°”Àπ¥  
– 1 –  
INSTALLATION  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. However,  
you should make adjustments corresponding to your specific  
car. If you have any questions or require information regarding  
installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company  
supplying kits.  
安裝  
°“√µ¥µß  
下面的圖解表示了典型的安裝程式。然而,您應當做些適當的  
調整,以便適應您自己的汽車。如果您有問題,或需要有關配  
套元件的資料,請向 JVC 汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司  
詢問。  
¿“æª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß°“√µ¥µßµ“¡ª°µ Õ¬“߉√°µ“¡ ∑“π§«√∑”°“√ª√  
∫µ”·Àπß„À‡À¡“– ¡°∫√∂¢Õß∑“π À“°¡§”∂“¡À√ÕµÕß°“√¢Õ¡≈‡°¬«°  
∫™ÿ¥°“√µ¥µß ª√¥ª√°…“µ«·∑π®”À𓬇§Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ¬ÀÕ JVC  
À√ÕÕ“π®“°§¡Õ∑„À¡“æ√Õ¡°π  
Detaching the dome light cover / 拆開頂燈蓋子 / °“√∂Õ¥Ω“§√Õ∫‰ø√ª¥¡  
To mount the widescreen monitor, detach the dome light covers.  
1
As illustrated, depress the two portions on the cover indicated by  
the marks 5 (1), then pull off the cover (2).  
1
裝上寬熒幕監視器前先拆開頂燈蓋子。  
如插圖所示,按下蓋子上標(1),然後拉出蓋子,  
(2) 所示。  
„π°“√µ¥µß¡Õπ‡µÕ√®Õ°«“ß „À∂Õ¥Ω“§√Õ∫‰ø√ª‚¥¡ÕÕ°  
2
°¥‡¥Õ¬ Õßµ«µ“¡‡§√ÕßÀ¡“¬ 5 (1) ·≈«¥ßΩ“§√Õ∫ÕÕ° (2) µ“¡√ª  
裝上寬熒幕監視器  
°“√µ¥µß¡Õπ‡µÕ√®Õ°«“ß  
Mounting the widescreen monitor  
每種汽車的安裝程序各異。下列為其中一例子。詳細安裝程序請  
參閱右頁描述。  
我們建議您由合格技工安裝監視器系統。安裝監視器於車頂之  
前。  
Installation procedure varies among cars. The following is an  
example. For detailed procedure, see the right page.  
It is recommended to have the monitor system installed by  
a qualified technician.  
√∂·µ≈–§π¡¢πµÕπ„π°“√µ¥µß·µ°µ“ß°π ¥Àπ“∑“ߢ«“ ”À√∫¢  
πµÕπ√“¬≈–‡Õ¬¥  
µÕ‰ªπ®–‡ªπµ«Õ¬“ßÀπߢÕß√ª·∫∫°“√µ¥µß  
°“√µ¥µß™ÿ¥®Õ¿“æ§«√°√–∑”‚¥¬™“ߺ™”π“≠‡∑“ππ  
Widescreen monitor  
寬熒幕監視器  
¡Õπ‡µÕ√®Õ°«“ß  
1
1
*
*
Nuts (M5): x 12  
螺母 (M5): x 12  
·À«π‡°≈¬« (M5): x 12  
Ceiling panel  
頂棚鑲板  
Ceiling reinforcement crosspieces  
頂棚加固橫杆  
TV tuner, etc  
電視調諧器,等等  
·ºß‡æ¥“π¥“π∫π  
·ºß‡À≈°‡ √¡‡æ¥“π  
‡§√Õß√∫‚∑√∑»π œ≈œ  
Car receiver, etc.  
汽車接收器等  
Slide plates  
滑板  
1
*
·ºπ‡≈Õπ  
‡§√Õß√∫ ≠≠“≥∫π√∂¬πµ œ≈œ  
2
*
2
*
Screws M5 x 10 mm: x 12  
螺絲M5 x 10 毫米: x 12  
πÕµ M5 x 10 ¡¡: x 12  
Before mounting the monitor, make sure that the screws do not  
reach the ceiling panel.  
Base plate  
底板  
2
*
在安裝屏幕之前,先確定螺絲不會觸到頂棚鑲板。  
·ºπ√Õß√∫  
°Õπµ¥µß®Õ¿“æ ¥„À·π„®«“‰¡‰¥¢π °√·ππ®π∂ß·ºß‡æ¥“π¥“π∫π  
2
*
When NOT using the shroud/不使用遮蓋時/‡¡  
*3 Flat washers–ø 5 mm: x 6  
Õ‰¡™·ºπ√Õ߮տ“æ  
平墊圈–ø 5 毫米:x 6  
·À«π‡°≈¬«∑√ß·∫π–ø 5 ¡¡: x 6  
These should not be used if the monitor position after  
installed seems so low that it may interfere with visibility  
through the rearview mirror.  
When using the shroud/使用遮蓋時/‡¡  
3
*
*
4
5
*
Spacers: black–7 mm : x 4  
間隔墊圈: 黑色–7 毫米: x 4  
·À«π√Õß: ¥”–7 ¡¡: x 4  
*
4
如果安裝好監視器後發現它的位置太低,則不要使用這些,  
否則會影響後視鏡的能見度。  
5
*
Spacers: silver–9 mm: x 2  
間隔墊圈: 銀色–9 : x 2  
·À«π√Õß: ‡ßπ–9 ¡¡: x 2  
‰¡§«√„™ À“°µ”·ÀπߢÕ߮տ“æÀ≈ßµ¥µß·≈« Õ¬µ”‡°π‰ª®πÕ“®√∫°«π∑  
»π–« ¬„π°“√¡Õß°√–®°À≈ß  
Shroud  
遮蓋  
∑§√Õ∫  
*6 Flat washer–ø 5 mm: x 6  
平墊圈–ø 5 毫米: x 6  
·À«π‡°≈¬«∑√ß·∫πø 5 ¡¡: x 6  
*7 Screws–M5 x 14 mm x 6  
or M5 x 23 mm x 6–when using the shroud  
螺絲釘–M5 x 14 x 6  
Widescreen monitor  
寬熒幕監視器  
6
*
¡Õπ‡µÕ√®Õ°«“ß  
M5 x 23 x 6–若使用罩蓋  
πÕµM5 x 14 ¡¡ x 6  
7
*
À√Õ M5 x 23 ¡¡ x 6‡¡Õ„™‡À≈°ª√–°∫  
– 2 –  
°Õπµ¥µß®Õ¿“懢“°∫‡æ¥“π√∂:  
Before mounting the monitor to the ceiling:  
• Perform the required external connections first (see reverse  
page).  
• Wear goggles or protective eyewear to protect your eyes  
especially while drilling the holes.  
首先執行必要的外部連接:  
„À∑”°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ¿“¬πÕ°∑®”‡ªπ°Õπ (æ≈°Àπ“À≈ß)  
首先執行必要的外部連接(請參閱背頁)。  
戴護目鏡或者保護眼罩可保護您的眼睛,尤其是在鑽孔時。  
注意不要損壞汽車內部零件,裝置及車頂。  
«¡·«πµ“ À√Õ‡§√ÕߪÕß°πµ“ ‡æÕª°ªÕߥ«ßµ“¢Õß§ÿ≥ ‚¥¬‡©æ“–¢≥–‡®“–√  
√–«ßÕ¬“„À« ¥ √«¡∂ßÕÿª°√≥∑µ¥µß¿“¬„π ·≈–À≈ß§“√∂‡ ¬À“¬  
ÿ
• Pay attention not to damage the car interior and its fittings and  
the ceiling of your car.  
2
3
4
1
5
Paper template  
紙模板  
·ºπ°√–¥“…·∫∫  
6 7 8  
7
1摘除頂燈及車頂內飾板。  
1∂Õ¥Ω“§√Õ∫‰ø√ª¥¡ ·≈–« ¥ÿÿ¥“π„πÕÕ°®“°‡æ¥“π√∂  
1Remove the dome light and interior headliner from  
the ceiling.  
2ª√–°Õ∫™π «π¢Õß·ºπ‡≈Õπ ·≈–·ºπ√Õß∞“π  
2安裝滑板及底板。  
°ÕπÕπ®–µÕß°”Àπ¥µ”·Àπß „π°“√µ¥µß®Õ¿“æ ·≈–§«“¡¬“«¢Õß·ºß‡≈Õπ  
首先應確定監視器的安裝位置及組合滑板的長度。  
2Assemble the slide plates and the base plate.  
• Determine the monitor installation position and length of  
combined slide panels first.  
3µ¥·ºππ°“√ª√–°Õ∫®Õ¿“æ °∫·°π‡ √¡∑‡æ¥“π√∂  
3將安裝板附在頂棚加固橫杆上。  
在頂棚加固橫杆上鑽四個孔,孔的大小應與安裝板的安裝孔  
大小一致。  
‡®“–√ √∑·°π‡ √¡‡æ¥“π „ÀæÕ¥°∫√∑®–„™„π°“√µ¥µß·ºπª√–°Õ∫®Õ¿“æ  
3Attach the assembled plates to the ceiling  
reinforcement crosspieces.  
4À≈ß®“°‡¥π “¬‰ø·≈« ®ßµ¥« ¥  
ÿÿ¥“π„π°≈∫‡¢“∑  
• Drill the four holes in the ceiling reinforcement crosspieces  
to meet the mounting holes of the assembled plates.  
4完成連線後將車頂內飾板裝上。  
5µ¥« ¥ ÕÕ° ‚¥¬„™·ºπ°√–¥“…·∫∫À¡“æ√Õ¡‡§√Õß  
ÿ∫ÿ  
6µÕ “¬√¥ ·≈–ª≈° ®“°‡æ¥“π√∂ ¡“¬ß®Õ¿“æ  
4Finish wiring then attach the interior headliner.  
5用提供的紙模板切內飾板連線。  
„π°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø ·≈–°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ “¬µ“ßÊ „À¥Àπ“À≈ß  
5Cut off the headliner using the supplied paper  
6將導線及插座穿過車頂棚連接到監視器。  
7µ¥·ºπ√Õ߮տ“æ ·≈–®Õ¿“æ °∫·ºπ√Õß∞“π  
‡¡Õ„™·ºπ√Õß §«√„ ·À«π√Õß∑„À¡“æ√Õ¡‡§√Õߥ«¬ ‡æÕ„À‰¥√–¬–∑‡À¡“–  
¡ √–À«“ß·ºπ√Õß∞“π°∫·ºπ√Õ߮տ“æ  
template.  
連線及連接詳情請參閱反面。  
6Connect the harness and plugs from the ceiling to  
the monitor.  
7將遮蓋和監視器附在底板上。  
À“°·À«π√Õß·≈– °√∑„À¡“æ√Õ¡‡§√Õ߉¡ “¡“√∂√°…“√–¬–∑‡À¡“– ¡«  
¥ÿÿ„µÀ≈ß§“ °∫®Õ¿“扥 ¢Õ„À¥¥·ª≈ß·À«π√Õß·≈– °√  
當使用遮蓋時,為保持底板與遮蓋之間的最佳距離請插入附  
送的間隔墊圈。  
• For wiring and connections, see the reverse side.  
(À√ÕÀ“·À«π√Õß·≈– °√∑¡¢π“¥‡À¡“– ¡¡“„™)  
如果附送的間隔墊圈和螺絲不能在紙模板和監視器之間保持  
最佳距離,請更換間隔墊圈和螺絲(或找到合適長度的墊圈  
和螺絲)。  
7Attach the shroud and the monitor to the base plate.  
• When using the shroud, the supplied spacers should be  
inserted to be kept the appropriate distance between the  
base plate and the shroud.  
8À≈ß®“°µ¥µß®Õ¿“æ·≈« „Àµ¥Ω“§√Õ∫‰ø√ª‚¥¡°≈∫‡¢“∑  
If the supplied spacers and screws cannot keep the  
appropriate distance between the headliner and the monitor,  
modify the spacers and screws (or obtain those of the  
appropriate length).  
8固定好監視器後,將頂燈罩裝上。  
8After mounting the monitor, attach the dome light  
covers.  
– 3 –  
ENGLISH  
中文  
‰∑¬  
電路連接  
為防止短路,建議在安裝本機之前,斷開電池的負極,並把所有  
電路都連接好。如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機,應請合格  
的技術人員來安裝。  
°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ‰øø“  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the  
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections  
before installing the unit. If you are not sure how to install this unit  
correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
‡æÕ  
∑”°“√‡™  
‚ª√¥„À™“ߺ™”π“≠µ¥µß„À  
À¡“¬‡Àµ  
™¥®Õ¿“æπ∂°ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“„À∑”ß“π°∫√–∫∫‰øø“¢«≈∫∑µÕ “¬≈ߥπ°√–· µ√ß¢π“¥  
12 V À“°√∂¢Õß∑“π‰¡‰¥„™√–∫∫π ®”‡ªπµÕß„™Õπ‡«Õ√‡µÕ√´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥∑µ  
«·∑π®”À𓬇§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ¬ÀÕ JVC  
‡ª≈¬πø« ‚¥¬„™§“„¥§“Àπ߇©æ“–µÕ‰ªπ À“°ø« ¢“¥∫Õ¬ ‚ª√¥ª√°…“µ  
«·∑π®”À𓬇§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ¬ÀÕ JVC  
ªÕß°π‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„À∑“π∂Õ¥¢« “¬‰ø≈∫¢Õß·∫µ‡µÕ√ÕÕ°°Õπ·≈–  
Õ¡µÕ‰øø“∑ßÀ¡¥°Õπµ¥µß™ÿ¥®Õ¿“æÀ“°‰¡·π„®«∏°“√µ¥µß∑∂°µÕß  
注意︰  
ÿ:  
本機僅可使用直流 12 V 、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛  
沒有這一電源系統,則需要一個電壓變換器,可以JVC 汽車音  
響分銷商處買到。  
ÿ
Note:  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground  
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a  
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car  
audio dealers.  
把保險絲更換為額定負荷值的保險絲。如果保險絲經常燒壞,  
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified ratings. If the fuse  
blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
Typical Connections / 典型連接 / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫∑«‰ª  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.  
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the  
car body may be different in color.  
連接之前:請仔細檢查汽車內的接線。錯誤的接線可能導致本機  
嚴重損傷。  
電源線的導線和那些連接汽車身體的導線的顏色可能不同。  
°Õπ°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ: ‚ª√¥µ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø„π√∂Õ¬“ß√Õ∫§Õ∫  
°“√µÕ “¬‰ø∑‰¡∂°µÕßÕ“® √“ß§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬¢π√  
ÿ
π·√ß„À°∫™  
ÿ
¥®Õ¿“æπ¥  
“¬‰ø ·≈– “¬µÕ®“°¢«∑µ«√∂ Õ“®¡ ·µ°µ“ß°π  
1 根據以下次序將電源線的顏色導線連接至汽車電池、汽車燈控  
1 µÕ “¬‰øªπ °∫·∫µ‡µÕ∂¬πµ «µ™§«∫§  
ÿ¡‰ø√∂¬πµ ·≈–  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord to the car battery,  
the car light control switch, and the door sensor in the following  
sequence.  
制開關和門傳感器。  
‡´π‡´Õ√∑ª√–µ µ“¡≈”¥∫¥ßπ  
1 黑色:接地  
1 ¥”: µÕ°∫ “¬¥π  
2 黃色:接至汽車電池(恆12 V)  
3 紅色:接至附屬的端子  
4 橙色:接至汽車燈控制開關  
1 Black: ground  
2 ‡À≈◊Õß: µÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂ (·∫∫§ß∑ ¢π“¥ 12 V)  
2 Yellow: to car battery (constant 12 V)  
3 Red: to an accessory terminal  
4 Orange: to car light control switch  
3 ·¥ß: µÕ°∫Õ  
ÿ
ª°√≥  
4
¡: †«µ´§«•§¡‰ø¢Õß••¬•µ•  
ÿ
DOMELIGHT  
DOMELIGHT  
5 灰色帶有紅色條紋:接至門傳感器(DOOR SW)  
6 黑色帶有紅色條紋:接地(DOMELIGHT)  
7 黃色帶有紅色條紋:接至汽車電池(恆12 V)  
DOMELIGHT  
5 Gray with red stripe: to the door sensor (DOOR SW)  
6 Black with red stripe: ground (DOMELIGHT)  
7 Yellow with red stripe: to car battery (constant 12 V)  
5 ‡∑“·∂∫·¥ß: µÕ°∫‡´π‡´Õ√∑ª√–µ (DOOR SW)  
6 ¥”·∂∫·¥ß: µÕ “¬¥π (DOMELIGHT)  
7 ‡À≈  
2 ¢π  
°“√„™ “¬√«¡‡æ  
◊Õß·∂∫·¥ß: µÕ·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ (·∫∫§ß∑ ¢π“¥ 12 V)  
2 最後將導線連接到本機。  
2 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
• Using the joint cord makes the connection/disconnection  
easier.  
使用連接線使連接與拆卸變的更加簡單。  
ÿ
¥∑“¬„ÀµÕ¡¥ “¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™  
ÿ
¥®Õ¿“æ  
Õ¡µÕ‰¥ß“¬¢π  
Joint cord  
2
連接線  
“¬√«¡  
1
Ignition switch  
2
*
點火開關  
Black / / ¥”  
«µ™ µ“√∑‡§√Õß¬πµ  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
*
接至金屬體或汽車底盤  
µÕ‡¢“°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ·™ ´¢Õß√∂  
Yellow*1  
黃色*1  
‡À≈Õ  
ß*1  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch)  
接至與汽車電池相連接的保險絲單元內的未使用的端子(用於旁路點火開關)  
µÕ‰ª¬ß¢«∫«°∑Õ¬„π°≈Õßø« ∑‡¥π “¬‰ø‰ª¬ß·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ (‰¡º“π «µ™ µ“√∑‡§√  
5 A fuse  
5 A 保險絲  
ø« 5 A  
Red  
紅色  
·¥ß  
Fuse block  
保險絲單元  
°≈Õßø«  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
接至保險絲單元內的附屬端子  
µÕ‡¢“°∫Õÿª°√≥„π°≈Õßø«  
3 A fuse  
3 A 保險絲  
ø« 3 A  
Orange  
橙色  
¡
*1 Before checking the operation of this  
unit prior to installation, this lead must  
be connected, otherwise power  
cannot be turned on.  
*1 在安裝本機和進行工作狀況檢查之前,  
請務必連接此導線接頭,否則不能開  
啟電源。  
To car light control switch  
接至汽車燈控制開關  
*2 Not included with this unit.  
*2 不包含在本機內。  
†«µ´§«•§¡‰ø¢ÕSS••¬•µ•  
ÿ
Gray with red stripe  
灰色帶有紅色條紋  
‡∑“·∂∫·¥ß  
*2 ‰¡√«¡™¥  
®Õ¿“æπ  
To the door sensor  
接至門傳感器  
*1 µÕßµÕ†“¬‰ø•°Õ•∑®–µ•«®†Õ•°“•∑”ß“•¢Õß  
µÕ°∫ «µ™‡´π‡´Õ√∑ª√–µ  
Black with red stripe  
黑色帶有紅色條紋  
¥”·∂∫·¥ß  
2
*
ÿ¥®Õ¿“æ°Õ•°“•µ¥µß¡‡™••• ªÿ¡‡ª¥/ª¥®–  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
‰¡∑”ß“•  
2
接至金屬體或汽車底盤  
*
µÕ‡¢“°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ·™ ´¢Õß√∂  
1 A fuse  
Yellow with red stripe  
黃色帶有紅色條紋  
‡À≈Õß·∂∫·¥ß  
1 A 保險絲  
ø« 1 A  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch)  
接至與汽車電池相連接的保險絲單元內的未使用的端子(用於旁路點火開關)  
7
µÕ‰ª¬ß¢«∫«°∑Õ¬„π°≈Õßø« ∑‡¥π “¬‰ø‰ª¬ß·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ (‰¡º“π «µ™ µ“√∑‡§√Õ߬πµ)  
– 4 –  
Connecting the leads / 連接電線 / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ “¬‰ø  
Solder the core wires to connect them securely.  
銜接電線芯心以將它們穩固連接。  
Twist the core wires when connecting.  
連接時彎曲電線芯心。  
∫¥°√ “¬‰øÀ≈°‡¢“¥«¬°πÕ¬“ß·ππÀπ“  
¡«π “¬‰øÀ≈°¢≥–‡™Õ¡µÕ  
CAUTION / 注意 / ¢Õ§«√√–«ß:  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
為免電源短路,用絕緣帶包裹 電線的終端。  
§«√„™‡∑ªæπ√Õ∫ª≈“¬ “¬‰ø∑‰¡‰¥„™ ‡æÕªÕß°π‰øø“≈¥«ß®√  
CONNECTING TO THE RECEIVER AND  
EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
µÕ°∫‡§√Õß√∫ ·≈–Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ°  
連接到接收器和外部設備  
DO NOT connect the AV1-IN and AV2-INPUT plugs on the  
monitor to the LINE OUT or SUBWOOFER plugs of the car  
receiver.  
Õ¬“µÕª≈° AV1-IN ·≈– AV2-INPUT ∫π®Õ¿“æ °∫¢« LINE OUT ¢Õߪ≈°  
SUBWOOFER ∫π‡§√Õß√∫∑µ¥µß„π√∂¬πµ  
不要將監視器上AV1-IN AV2-INPUT 插頭連接到汽車接收  
器的低音揚聲器LINE OUT 接口。  
See also “About sounds reproduced through the terminals” on page 36 of the INSTRUCTIONS.  
請參閱說明36 頁的“有關自端子輸出的聲音”  
Audio/video control amplifier or the decoder compatible with the  
multichannel digital sources  
¥‡æ¡‡µ¡„π‡√  
與此多聲道數碼音源兼容的聲音/影像控制擴音機或解碼器  
·Õ¡æ≈‰ø‡ÕÕ√§«∫§  
ÿ
¡‡ ¬ß/¿“æÀ√  
Õ‡§√  
Õß∂Õ¥√À (decoder) ∑ “¡“√∂„¥°  
Digital optical cable (not supplied)  
數碼輸出電纜(沒有配備)  
DIGITAL OUT  
∫´Õ√ ¥®µÕ≈·∫∫¡≈µ·™π·π≈  
“¬¥®µÕ•·••ÕÕæµ§Õ• (‰¡‰¥„À¡“æ•Õ¡‡§••Õß)  
3
*
AV-OUT  
(or equivalent terminal)  
(或相似終端)  
LINE IN  
(À√Õ  
¢«∑‡À¡Õπ°π)  
Car receiver  
汽車接收器  
‡§√Õß√∫ ≠≠“≥∫π√∂¬πµ  
AV1-IN  
KV-MRD900  
2nd monitor  
第二監視器  
®Õ¿“æ∑ Õß  
When using the TV tuner system KV-C1000/KV-C1001/KV-C1008  
當使用電視調諧系統 KV-C1000/KV-C1001/KV-C1008  
AV2-INPUT  
Rear side  
後側  
‡¡Õ„™°∫‡§√Õß√∫‚∑√∑»π KV-C1000/KV-C1001/KV-C1008  
¥“πÀ≈ß  
Antenna elements (supplied with KV-C1000/KV-C1001/KV-C1008)  
天線組件(KV-C1000/KV-C1001/KV-C1008 提供)  
«πª√–°Õ∫ “¬Õ“°“» („À¡“æ√Õ¡√ÿπ KV-C1000/KV-C1001/KV-C1008)  
KS-HP2  
4
*
4
*
3
*
3
*
Remote sensor unit  
(supplied with KV-C1000/  
KV-C1001/KV-C1008)  
遙控器組件  
Playback source / 播放源 / ·À≈ß ≠≠“≥¿“æ  
KV-C1000/KV-C1001/  
KV-C1008 提供)  
Õ
ÿ
ÿ
VCR (KV-V8 or KZ-V10)  
錄影(KV-V8 KZ-V10)  
«´Õ“√ (KV-V8 À√Õ KZ-V10)  
Camcorder  
攝影機  
KV-C1000  
KV-C1001  
KV-C1008  
·§¡§Õ√‡¥Õ√  
*3 “¬µÕª≈°∑¡¢“·∫∫ RCA (‰¡‰¥„À¡“æ√Õ¡‡§√  
*4 “¬«¥‚Õ (‰¡‰¥„À¡“æ√Õ¡‡§√  
Õß)  
Õß)  
*3 RCA pin plug cord (not supplied)  
*4 Video cord (not supplied)  
*3 RCA 針式插塞導線(沒有配備)  
*4 影像電線 (沒有配備)  
– 5 –  
To disconnect the harness, unlock the harness using the screw  
driver or a similar tool, then pull out the harness. (Detach the  
dome light cover prior to this.)  
若要拆開導線,用螺絲起子解開導線,然後將導線拉出。(在這之前先拆  
掉座艙頂燈燈蓋。)  
°“√ª≈¥ “¬≈Õ°ÕÕ° „Àª≈¥ “¬≈Õ°‚¥¬„™‰¢§«ß À√  
π¥ß “¬≈Õ°ÕÕ° (∂Õ¥Ω“§√Õ∫‰ø√ª‚¥¡ÕÕ°°Õπ)  
◊Õ‡§√◊Õß¡◊Õ∑¡≈°…≥–§≈“¬°  
2
1
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided with this unit.  
After checking them, please set them correctly.  
安裝和連接用零件表  
本機備有下列零件,在檢查這些零件之後,請正確組裝。  
√“¬°“√™π «π ”À√∫°“√µ¥µß·≈–°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ  
™π «πµÕ‰ªπ‰¥®¥‡µ√¬¡‰«„Àæ√Õ¡°∫™ÿ¥®Õ¿“æ À≈  
ß®“°µ√«® Õ∫·≈« ‚ª√¥µ¥µß„πµ”·Àπß∑∂°µÕß  
Remote controller  
遙控器  
Cordless headphones  
無線耳機  
√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈  
Àøß‰√ “¬  
Battery  
乾電池  
·∫µ‡µÕ√  
Battery  
乾電池  
·∫µ‡µÕ√  
CR2025  
RM-RK230  
R03/AAA  
Widescreen monitor  
寬熒幕監視器  
KS-HP2  
¡Õπ‡µÕ√®Õ°«“ß  
Joint cord  
連接線  
“¬√«¡  
Power cord  
電源線  
“¬‰ø  
Nuts M5: x 12  
螺母 M5: x 12  
Paper template  
·À«π‡°≈¬« M5: x 12  
Base plate  
Spacers: silver–9 mm: x 2  
間隔墊圈: 銀色–9 毫米: x 2  
·À«π√Õß: ‡ßπ–9 ¡¡: x 2  
紙模板  
底板  
·ºπ°√–¥“…·∫∫  
·ºπ√Õß√∫  
Screws–M5 x 10 mm: x 12  
螺絲釘–M5 x 10 毫米: x 12  
πÕµ–M5 x 10 ¡¡: x 12  
Spacers: black–7 mm: x 4  
間隔墊圈: 黑色–7 毫米: x 4  
·À«π√Õß: ¥”–7 ¡¡: x 4  
Screws–M5 x 14 mm: x 6  
螺絲釘–M5 x 14 毫米: x 6  
πÕµM5 x 14 ¡¡ : x 6  
Slide plates  
Screws–M5 x 23 mm: x 6  
螺絲釘–M5 x 23 毫米: x 6  
πÕµM5 x 23 ¡¡: x 6  
Flat washers–ø 5 mm : x 12  
平墊–ø 5 毫米: x 12  
Shroud  
滑板  
遮蓋  
·ºπ‡≈◊Õπ  
·À«π‡°≈¬«∑√ß·∫π–ø 5 ¡¡: x 12  
∑§√Õ∫  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
故障排除  
°“√·°¢ª≠À“‡∫Õßµπ  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
保險絲燒斷。  
* 紅色和黑色導線接頭是否正確連接?  
ø« ¢“¥  
* µÕ “¬‰ø ·¥ß·≈–¥”Õ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ  
‰¡  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
電源不能接通。  
* 黃色導線接頭是否接上?  
‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥ª  
ÿ
* µÕ “¬‰ø ‡À≈Õß·≈«„™À√  
• Picture does not come on screen.  
* Is the correct input selected?  
¿“扡ª√“°Ø∫π®Õ  
* ‡≈Õ°Õπæµ∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡  
熒幕不出畫面。  
* 檢查是否選擇正確輸入?  
ÿ
• Dome lights cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow and red stripe lead connected?  
‰ø√ª¥¡‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‰¥  
* µÕ “¬‰ø·∂∫‡À≈Õß ·≈–·∂∫·¥ßÀ√Õ¬ß  
無法打開頂燈。  
* 黃色和紅色條紋導線是經連接了?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
‡§••Õ߉¡∑”ß“•  
* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡À√Õ¬ß  
本機完全不能操作。  
* 您是否已經重置您的機組?  
– 6 –  

RCA EZ205 User Manual
Raypak XTHERM 2005 User Manual
QSC Audio Car Speaker KSub User Manual
Philips FMXXFD20B User Manual
PB Heat MI User Manual
Panasonic Palmcorder PV GS300 User Manual
Panasonic HDC HS250PC User Manual
Kalorik USK BL 24088 User Manual
JVC LYT0002 019A User Manual
JVC KD R820BT User Manual